Navigation

  • Page 1

    GE Fanuc AutomationComputer Numerical Control ProductsSeries 15i Model BSeries 150i Model BConnection ManualGFZ-63783EN-1/01June 2002

  • Page 2

    GFL-001Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this PublicationWarningWarning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.In situatio...

  • Page 3

    B-63783EN-1/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEs-1DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEThis manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.Precautions are classified into Warning an...

  • Page 4

  • Page 5

    B-63783EN-1/01 PREFACEp-1PREFACEContents of this documentThis manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machinetool builders to design their CNC machine tools. ...

  • Page 6

    PREFACE B-63783EN-1/01p-2Signal descriptionRelation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and themachine tool is shown below:NOTEFor the signals, a single data number is assigned to8 ...

  • Page 7

    B-63783EN-1/01 PREFACEp-3Parameter descriptionParameters are classified by data type as follows :Data typeValid data rangeRemarksBitBit axisBit spindle0 or 1IntegerInteger axi...

  • Page 8

    PREFACE B-63783EN-1/01p-4Related Manuals for Series 15i/150i- MODEL BThe table below lists manuals related to MODEL B of Series 15i andSeries 150i.In the table, this manual is marked with a...

  • Page 9

    B-63783EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTSc-1TABLE OF CONTENTSSAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1PREFACE................................

  • Page 10

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63783EN-1/01c-21.5.4Servo Warning Details Signal ............................................................................. 1531.6SETTINGS RELATED TO COORDINATE SYSTEMS .....................

  • Page 11

    B-63783EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTSc-32.3.2Stored Stroke Check 1 ......................................................................................... 3042.3.3Stroke Check 2..............

  • Page 12

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63783EN-1/01c-45.3.3Single Block ........................................................................................................ 4885.4MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ..........................

  • Page 13

    B-63783EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTSc-56.17SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION ........................6026.18NURBS INTERPOLATION ......................................................

  • Page 14

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63783EN-1/01c-67.2.3.1In-position check..............................................................................................7177.2.4Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse .....................

  • Page 15

    B-63783EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTSc-710.4.7Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset ............................................................... 104410.4.8Three-dimensional Cutter Compensat...

  • Page 16

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63783EN-1/01c-812.1.3Alarm Display.................................................................................................... 127912.1.4Operator Message Display........................

  • Page 17

    B-63783EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTSc-912.2.8Editing a Running Program ............................................................................... 136012.2.9DO Signal Output by Soft Key...

  • Page 18

  • Page 19

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 1 -1 AXIS CONTROL

  • Page 20

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 2 -1.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXESGeneralSeries 15i/150iItemStandardspecificationMultiaxisspecificationNumber of basic controlled axes3Extension of the number ofcontrolled a...

  • Page 21

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 3 -1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS1.2.1 Axis NameGeneralThose axes (including PMC-controlled axes) that are controlled by theCNC must be named.Axis names can be se...

  • Page 22

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 4 -Parameter1020Program axis name for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]65 - 90The programmed axis name of each controlled axis i...

  • Page 23

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 5 -1021Subscripts of the axis names of parallel, synchronization control, andtandem control axes[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid d...

  • Page 24

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 6 -1.2.2 Increment SystemGeneralThe increment system depends on the combination of the least inputincrement (input increment) and least command increment (outputincrement)...

  • Page 25

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 7 -When bit 0 (IM0) of parameter No. 1013 for increasing the inputincrement 10 times is set to 1, and a command is issued withoutspecifying the decimal p...

  • Page 26

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 8 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1INMINMINMINMSpecifies whether the least command increment for the linear axis ismetric or in inches.0: Metric. (The machine is a millimeter...

  • Page 27

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 9 - # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ISAISAISAISA # # # # 1111ISCISCISCISC # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2ISDISDISDISD # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3IS...

  • Page 28

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 10 -1.2.3 Rotation Axis SpecificationGeneralWhether an axis is to be set as a linear axis or rotation axis can bespecified on an axis-by-axis basis with bit 0 (ROT) of par...

  • Page 29

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 11 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1ROSROSROSROSSpecifies whether the machine coordinate system used for stroke checkand automatic reference position return ...

  • Page 30

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 12 -1260Angular displacement about the rotation axis when the connected motorrotates one turnNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned offthen ba...

  • Page 31

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 13 -5425Angular displacement per rotation in rotation-axis pitch error compensationNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned of...

  • Page 32

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 14 -1.2.4 Controlled Axes DetachGeneralThese signals release the specified control axes from control.When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), thesesi...

  • Page 33

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 15 -Controlled axis detach status signalsMDTCH1<F64#7>, MDTCH2<F68#7>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]These signals notify the PMC...

  • Page 34

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 16 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01005RMB[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7RMBRMBRMBRMBFor each axis, specifies whether the control axis detach si...

  • Page 35

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 17 -Caution CAUTIONWhen a 2-axis or 3-axis amplifier is used, releasingonly one axis from control results in the output ofSV013 (V ready off). Use 1-axi...

  • Page 36

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 18 -1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an AxisGeneralThe movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC.SignalAxis moving signalsMV1<F64#2>, MV2<F68#2&g...

  • Page 37

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 19 - CAUTION1 These signals maintain their existing condition duringa stop, indicating the direction of the axes' movementbefore being stopped.2 In the c...

  • Page 38

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 20 -1.2.6 Mirror ImageGeneralMirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or byparameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions arereverse...

  • Page 39

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 21 -Mirror image check signalMMI1<F65#0>, MI2<F69#0>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]These signals indicate the mirror image condi...

  • Page 40

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 22 -Caution CAUTION1 When programmable mirror image and ordinarymirror image are specified at the same time,programmable mirror image is applied first.2 No programmable mi...

  • Page 41

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 23 -1.2.7 Follow-upGeneralIf the machine moves in the state in which position control oncontrolled axes is disabled (during servo-off, emergency stop, or...

  • Page 42

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 24 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800FVF[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2FVFFVFFVFFVFSpecifies whether to perform follow-up in the servo-of...

  • Page 43

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 25 -1.2.8 Servo Off (Mechanical handle)GeneralPlace the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop thecurrent to the servo motor, which d...

  • Page 44

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 26 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01802SVF[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1SVFSVFSVFSVFSpecifies whether to validate the servo off signal...

  • Page 45

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 27 -1.2.9 Position SwitchGeneralPosition switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machinecoordinates along a controlled axes are within a specif...

  • Page 46

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 28 -- Setting the correspondence between position switch signals and controlled axes5270Controlled axis for which the tenth position switch function is performed(PSWA01)52...

  • Page 47

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 29 -- Setting of position switch operating ranges- Maximum value5280Maximum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW101)5281Maximum ...

  • Page 48

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 30 -- Minimum value5290Minimum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW201)5291Minimum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW20...

  • Page 49

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 31 -1.2.10 Vertical Axis Drop Prevention FunctionOverviewIf the machine is brought to an emergency stop and the power for aservo motor is turned off, the...

  • Page 50

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 32 -LimitationsIf a vertical axis and a nonvertical axis are connected to the samemultiaxis amplifier, the multiaxis amplifier turns off the power for thevertical axis at ...

  • Page 51

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 33 -1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error CompensationOverviewIf pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each...

  • Page 52

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 34 -Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data1Set the following parameters:-Number of the pitch error compensation position at thereference p...

  • Page 53

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 35 -Explanation- Specifying the compensation positionTo assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positivedirection or ...

  • Page 54

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 36 -Therefore, set the parameters as follows:ParameterSetting value5420 : Compensation number for the reference position405421 : Smallest compensation position number3354...

  • Page 55

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 37 -0.045.090.0135.0180.0225.0270.0315.0(68)(67)(66)(65)(64)(63)(62)(61)(+)Reference positionCompensation values are output at theposition...

  • Page 56

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 38 -Parameter5420Number of pitch error compensation point of reference position for each axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenb...

  • Page 57

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 39 -5421Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest negative value foreach axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the po...

  • Page 58

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 40 -5422Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest positive value foreach axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenb...

  • Page 59

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 41 -5424Interval of pitch error compensation points for each axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off t...

  • Page 60

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 42 -5425Angular displacement per rotation in rotation-axis pitch error compensationNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for...

  • Page 61

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 43 -CautionCAUTION- Compensation value rangeCompensation values can be set within the range from-7 x compensation magnification (detection...

  • Page 62

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 44 -1.3.2 Backlash CompensationGeneral- Backlash compensationFunction for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set acompensation value in parameter No. 1851, in ...

  • Page 63

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 45 -Procedures for measuring the backlash compensation amounts duringcutting feed and rapid traverse- Backlash compensation amount during ...

  • Page 64

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 46 -- Backlash compensation amount during rapid traverse1 Set the backlash compensation amount during rapid traverse(parameter No. 1849) to "0."2 Move the mach...

  • Page 65

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 47 -Operation examplesIn these examples, the following are assumed:Backlash compensation amount during cutting feed A = 40Backlash compens...

  • Page 66

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 48 -4Rapid traverse followed by rapid traverse in the opposite direction 0 100 200 300Rapid traverseG00 X100.0 ;Current compe...

  • Page 67

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 49 -8 Cutting feed followed by rapid traverse in the same direction 0 100 200 300Rapid traver...

  • Page 68

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 50 -1849Backlash compensation amount used for rapid traverse for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]-...

  • Page 69

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 51 -1.3.3 Straightness CompensationGeneralFor a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightnessbetween axes may deteriorate ma...

  • Page 70

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 52 -Parameter5481Axis number of straightness compensation move axis 15482Axis number of straightness compensation move axis 25483Axis number of straightness compensation ...

  • Page 71

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 53 -5511Compensation point number a of straightness compensation move axis 25512Compensation point number b of straightness compensation m...

  • Page 72

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 54 -5571Compensation corresponding to compensation point number a of move axis 35572Compensation corresponding to compensation point number b of move axis 35573Compensati...

  • Page 73

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 55 -NoteNOTE1 The straightness compensation function can be usedafter a moving axis and its compensation axis havereturned to the referenc...

  • Page 74

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 56 -1.3.4 Interpolated Straightness CompensationCompensation data, which is set using 128-point straightnesscompensation data, is divided into parts at equal intervals in...

  • Page 75

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 57 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05426IPC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 6IPCSpecifies whether to use the interpolating stra...

  • Page 76

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 58 -Warning WARNING1 If the feedrate is high, multiple compensation pulsesmay be output at one time depending on thestraightness compensation amount.2 To use this functio...

  • Page 77

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 59 -1.3.5 128 Straightness Compensation PointsOverviewIn straightness compensation, compensation data is set as thecompensation amounts at...

  • Page 78

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 60 -The following relationships hold:i δ = φ + (γ-α)ii π = φ + (β-α)and π, δ are automatically calculated from α, β, γ, and φ. Therefore, noparameters ne...

  • Page 79

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 61 -ExamplesThe following explains the method of setting parameters for the traveland compensation axes, as well as effective magnificatio...

  • Page 80

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 62 -As described above, a compensation axis can be set as a travel axis.If a compensation axis is set as such, the amount of travel due tocompensation on the travel axis ...

  • Page 81

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 63 -5494Axis number of compensation axis 4 for straightness compensation moveaxis 45495Axis number of compensation axis 5 for straightness...

  • Page 82

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 64 -5593Straightness compensation multiplier of move axis 35594Straightness compensation multiplier of move axis 45595Straightness compensation multiplier of move axis 5[...

  • Page 83

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 65 -Caution CAUTION 1 If the feedrate is high, multiple compensation pulsesmay be output at the same time depending on thestraightness com...

  • Page 84

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 66 -1.3.6 Interpolated Pitch Error CompensationOverviewIn stored pitch error compensation, the pitch error compensation pulseat each pitch error compensation point is out...

  • Page 85

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 67 --Number of the most distant pitch error compensation point on theside of each axisNo.5421-Number of the most distant pitch error compe...

  • Page 86

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 68 -1.3.7 Cyclic Second Pitch Error CompensationOverviewWhen a rotary table is rotated using a gear, there are two cycles of theoccurrence of pitch errors: One cycle is ...

  • Page 87

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 69 -Although a rotary table is used as an example here, cyclic second pitcherror compensation can be used in the same way when the machine...

  • Page 88

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 70 --Pitch error with a 360° cycle0°20°360°180°AεFig. 1.3.7 (e)-Pitch error after superimposition in portion APitch error with the cycle of therotation of the gear...

  • Page 89

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 71 -Parameter5430Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point inthe negative direction for each axis[Input type]P...

  • Page 90

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 72 -5433Magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - 100Set a magnificat...

  • Page 91

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 73 -1.3.8 Gradient CompensationOverviewBy compensating for those errors in tools such as feed screws thatdepend on the position of the mac...

  • Page 92

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 74 -Gradient compensation parameters must be set.a, b, c, d : Compensation point numbers. (Pitch error compensationpoint numbers are used. Parameters Nos. 5461 to 5464)...

  • Page 93

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 75 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPW0102ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.)The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect.This ...

  • Page 94

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 76 -1.3.9 Bidirectional Pitch Error CompensationOverviewIn bidirectional pitch error compensation, different pitch errorcompensation amounts can be set for travel in the ...

  • Page 95

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 77 -Set of pitch error compensation data forthe positive directionSet of pitch error compensation datafor the negative directionSet of n d...

  • Page 96

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 78 -Table 1.3.9 (b) Positive-direction pitch error dataCompensationpoint number2021222324252627Compensationamount to be set-1+10+1+1+2-1-1As pitch error data, always set ...

  • Page 97

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 79 -- Compensation exampleIf, in the setting example given in the previous section, the machinemovesfrom 0.0 to 40.0,from 40.0 to -40.0, a...

  • Page 98

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 80 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05426BDP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5BDPBDPBDPBDPSpecifies whether to use bidirectional pitch erro...

  • Page 99

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 81 -5422Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest positive value foreach axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer...

  • Page 100

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 82 -5425Angular displacement per rotation in rotation-axis pitch error compensation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine u...

  • Page 101

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 83 -5428Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movementis made to the reference position in the direction opposit...

  • Page 102

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 84 -1.3.10 Nano Interpolation Type Error CompensationOverviewThis function enables the servo output of interpolation-type pitch errorcompensation, third-dimensional error...

  • Page 103

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 85 -1.3.11 Smooth Backlash CompensationOverviewOrdinary backlash compensation outputs all backlash compensationpulses at a point where the...

  • Page 104

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 86 -- When ‘Smooth backlash compensation’ is requiredUsually, relationship between motor position and actual machineposition can be shown as Fig.1.3.11(c). In this ca...

  • Page 105

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 87 -In this case, when we apply current backlash compensation,compensation becomes too much just after the direction change. Withcircular ...

  • Page 106

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 88 -- Second-stage backlash compensation outputThe output of second-stage backlash compensation begins at distanceL1 from a point where the direction of axis movement is ...

  • Page 107

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 89 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01804RBK[Input type]Parameter input[Unit of data]Bit axisNOTEOnce this parameter is re-set, it is necessary toswitch th...

  • Page 108

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 90 -1846Distance at which the second stage of smooth backlash compensation begins[Input type]Parameter input[Unit of data]Integer axis[Valid data range]Detection unit[Val...

  • Page 109

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 91 -1849Amount of rapid traverse backlash compensation for an individual axis[Input type]Parameter input[Unit of data]Integer axis[Valid d...

  • Page 110

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 92 -1.3.12 Addition of 5000 Pitch Error Compensation PointsOverviewThis function can add 5000 points for stored, interpolation-type,bidirectional, and cyclic second pitch...

  • Page 111

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 93 -Caution CAUTION1 Stored pitch error compensation cannot be usedacross a standard compensation point (numbers 0 to1279 or, in a system ...

  • Page 112

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 94 -1.3.13 Thermal Growth Compensation along Tool VectorOutlineThe thermal growth compensation along tool vector, in added to thecompensation is input by using the extern...

  • Page 113

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 95 -Basic ProcedureThermal growth compensation is input by following the method.1. The PMC drives the start signal THML high and sets the ...

  • Page 114

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 96 -+X+Z(1) When data is positive( D> 0 : When the tool length is an extension )εx ( along the X axis )Dεz ( along the Z axis )ε( Direction of thermal growth )( Dir...

  • Page 115

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 97 -SignalsThermal growth compensation start signalTHML<G161#3>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Thermal growth compensation bec...

  • Page 116

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 98 -Signals address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G161THMLF179MTHMLG161THSTBF170THRENDG178THD07THD06THD05THD04THD03THD02THD01THD00G179THD15THD14THD13THD12THD11THD10THD09THD08Parameter60...

  • Page 117

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 99 -6084Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (first group)[Input type]Paramete...

  • Page 118

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 100 -6089Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (second group)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of...

  • Page 119

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 101 --The rotation axis rotates about an axis that perpendicularly intersectsthe plane formed by linear axis 1 and linear axis 2.-When the...

  • Page 120

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 102 -6104Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (first group)6105Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dime...

  • Page 121

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 103 -Parameter Nos. 6106 to 6107The direction of a compensation vector is set by setting an angular displacement(RA, RB) from the directio...

  • Page 122

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 104 -7517Offset value for angular displacement of a rotation axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the inc...

  • Page 123

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 105 - # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3HPEHPEHPEHPESpecifies the actual detection unit for the output of interpolation-typepitch error compensat...

  • Page 124

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 106 - CAUTION11 If detaching of any axis is done by the axis detachingsignal, the thermal growth compensation must becancelled.12 Parameter No.6080 to No.6089, No.6104 to...

  • Page 125

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 107 -1.4 THREE-DIMENSIONAL ERROR COMPENSATIONOverviewIn ordinary pitch error compensation, compensation is applied to aspecified compensat...

  • Page 126

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 108 -individual axes at the individual vertexes be Cnx, Cny, and CNz (wheren is a number between 1 and 8).Let the interior division ratio on the X-axis at P be x. Here, ...

  • Page 127

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 109 -- Input/output formatThe three-dimensional error compensation screen allows output/input(punching/reading) of compensation data. The...

  • Page 128

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 110 -Three-dimensional error compensation screen- Compensation amountCompensation point numbers are displayed, as well as compensationdata for the individual compensation...

  • Page 129

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 111 -- Punching of compensation data(1) Place the system in EDIT mode.(2) Click soft key [Punch].(3) Enter the file number and name as req...

  • Page 130

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 112 -5446Number of the three-dimensional error compensation point at the referenceposition (1-st axis)5447Number of the three-dimensional error compensation point at the ...

  • Page 131

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 113 -Caution CAUTIONThe setting of compensation data usingprogrammable parameter input (G10L51) must bespecified in canned cycle cancel mo...

  • Page 132

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 114 -1.5 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO CONTROLLED AXESTypical units handled through the servo interface include:-Digital controlled AC servo motor-Motor feedback: Serial cod...

  • Page 133

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 115 -1.5.1 Servo ParameterOverviewThis section explains the main servo parameters. For an explanation ofservo parameters not mentioned here, refer to t...

  • Page 134

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 116 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800IVOSAKCINCCIRFWFVFCVR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1CVRCVRCVRCVRSpecifies whether to issue a servo...

  • Page 135

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 117 - # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4CCICCICCICCISpecifies the value to be used as the effective area during cutting feed(cutting-feed effective area).0: Us...

  • Page 136

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 118 - # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7IVOIVOIVOIVOSpecifies whether to release the emergency stop state when an emergencystop occurs with the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal bein...

  • Page 137

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 119 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1DGPDGPDGPDGPSpecifies whether to set the digital servo parameters specific to the motorat power-on.0: Sets the digital ...

  • Page 138

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 120 - # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4APZAPZAPZAPZIndicates whether relative positioning of the machine position andabsolute-position detector is complete when an absolute-pos...

  • Page 139

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 121 - # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7ACMACMACMACMSpecify whether to use an optional command multiplication factor 1/N.0: Does not use the factor.1: Uses the...

  • Page 140

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 122 -1825Servo loop gain for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]0.01/sec[Valid data range]1 - 9999Specify the position control loop g...

  • Page 141

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 123 -1829Positioning deviation limit for each axis when it is stopped[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid...

  • Page 142

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 124 -1837Positioning deviation limit while the tool is moving in the rigid tapping mode[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid...

  • Page 143

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 125 -1849Backlash compensation amount used for rapid traverse for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit...

  • Page 144

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 126 -1851Backlash compensation for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]-9999 - 9999Specify the backlas...

  • Page 145

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 127 -1.5.2 Absolute Position DetectionOverviewEven after the CNC is turned off, the pulse coder, which is backed upby a battery, retains the position. ...

  • Page 146

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 128 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01815APCAPZ[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]BitaxisNOTEIf this parameter bit is changed, the power must be turned off andback on for the...

  • Page 147

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 129 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsOT0032NEED ZRN(ABS PCDR)The reference position and the absolute pulse codercounter value do not match.Another...

  • Page 148

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 130 -1.5.3 FSSB SettingGeneralConnecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high-speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses onlyone fib...

  • Page 149

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 131 -Explanation-SlaveIn an FSSB-based system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect theCNC toservo amplifiers and pulse modules. These amplifiers an...

  • Page 150

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 132 -- Default settingIf the power is turned on when 0 is set for both parameters FMD (bit 0of No. 1090) and ASE (bit 1 of No. 1090) because of, for example,parameter ini...

  • Page 151

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 133 -- Automatic settingWhen 0 is set for both parameters FMD (bit 0 of No. 1090) and ASE(bit 1 of No. 1090), automatic setting can be performed from th...

  • Page 152

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 134 -- Manual settingAfter 1 is set for parameter FMD (bit 0 of No. 1090) or after automaticsetting is performed (1 is set for parameter ASE (bit 1 of No. 1090),FSSB sett...

  • Page 153

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 135 -FSSB data displayThe FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axisinformation. This information can also be specified by the operator...

  • Page 154

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 136 -•AMPLIFIERThe amplifier type display consists of the letter A, whichstands for "amplifier", a number that indicates the placing ofthe amplifier, as count...

  • Page 155

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 137 -- Axis setting screenThe axis setting screen displays the information shown below:Fig. 1.5.3 (e)The axis setting screen displays the following item...

  • Page 156

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 138 -•TNDMThis item is the number specified in parameter No. 1097.Consecutive odd and even numbers are displayed for themaster and slave axes for tandem control.•EGBT...

  • Page 157

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 139 -FSSB data setting procedure On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenancescreen), pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the fol...

  • Page 158

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 140 -- Axis setting screenOn the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:•M1 : connector number for pulse module 1For an axis that uses pulse module 1...

  • Page 159

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 141 -•A duplicate value is specified for M2.•A duplicate value is specified for SPOS.•A duplicate value is specified for CS.•A duplicate value i...

  • Page 160

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 142 -Parameter1080Address conversion table value (ATR) for slave 11081Address conversion table value (ATR) for slave 21082Address conversion table value (ATR) for slave 3...

  • Page 161

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 143 -NOTE1 When using the electronic gear box (EGB) functionAlthough EGB and dummy axes do not require amplifiers,assume that they are connected to dum...

  • Page 162

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 144 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01092DSP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0DSPUsually, do not directly enter any value, because this parameter isspecified on the FSS...

  • Page 163

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 145 - # 6PM1Specifies whether to use the first pulse module.0: Do not use.1: Use. # 7PM2Specifies whether to use the second pulse module.0: Do not...

  • Page 164

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 146 -1027Spindle number of a spindle positioning1028Spindle number of a Cs contour control axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - 4Set...

  • Page 165

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 147 -1094Connector number of the 1-st pulse module1095Connector number of the second pulse module[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid...

  • Page 166

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 148 -1097Master and slave numbers for tandem control (on the FSSB setting screenonly)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - 8When performi...

  • Page 167

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 149 -Example of axis configuration and parameter setting- Example1Fig. 1.5.3 (h)Fig. 1.5.3 (i)The connection of slaves (servo amplifiers) and controlled...

  • Page 168

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 150 -- Example2M1/M2 : First/Second pulse moduleFig. 1.5.3 (j) Example of axis configuration and parameter setting when the simpleelectronic gearbox (EGB) function is us...

  • Page 169

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 151 -Example3If the system has 11 or more controlled axes, parameter No. 1110 to No.1109 and No. 1110 to No. 1119 as well as parameter No. 1080 to No.10...

  • Page 170

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 152 -NOTE2 The position detector of each axis can be connectedonly the pulse module connected with the same axiscontrol card. The position detector of each axiscannot be ...

  • Page 171

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 153 -1.5.4 Servo Warning Details SignalOverviewThe αi series servo amplifier now provides a signal that indicates awarning state before an alarm is iss...

  • Page 172

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 154 -1.6 SETTINGS RELATED TO COORDINATE SYSTEMS1.6.1 Machine Coordinate SystemGeneralA machine coordinate system uses a machine-specific point as itsorigin. The machine ...

  • Page 173

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 155 -1.6.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of WorkpieceCoordinate System PairGeneralA coordinate system used for machining a workpiec...

  • Page 174

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 156 -(2) Programming by G10 or G92 (G50)(3) Using external data input (refer to 15.2)Fig. 1.6.2 Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero p...

  • Page 175

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 157 -1221Offset of the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)1222Offset of the origin of workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)1223Off...

  • Page 176

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 158 -1.6.3 Rotation Axis Roll-overGeneralThe roll-over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis fromoverflowing. The roll-over function is enabled by setting b...

  • Page 177

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 159 - # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2ROPROPROPROPSpecifies whether the machine coordinate system used to perform theretained pitch error compe...

  • Page 178

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 160 -1.6.4 Cutting/Rapid Traverse In-position CheckOverviewThe cutting-/rapid traverse-specific in-position check enables aneffective area for the in-position check to be...

  • Page 179

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 161 -1.When a cutting feed block ends(1) If the next block is a cutting feed block, an in-position checkis made using a cutting feed effec...

  • Page 180

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 162 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800CINCCI[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4CCISpecifies what parameter is to be used to specify a cutting feedeffective area...

  • Page 181

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 163 -1827Effective area for an individual axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer axis[Unit of data]Detection unit[Valid data ra...

  • Page 182

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 164 -1.7 PARALLEL AXIS CONTROLGeneralWhen a machine tool is provided with multiple heads and multipletables, and multiple, identical workpieces are machined at the sameti...

  • Page 183

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 165 -- Tool length compensation and tool offset in a parallel axisTo apply tool length compensation to each axis, specify a differencebetw...

  • Page 184

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 166 -(2) Absolute command-Rapid traverse and linear interpolationThe absolute coordinates of the end point are identical for allparallel axes. In other words, if the sta...

  • Page 185

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 167 -SignalsParking signalsPK1<G65#4>, PK2<G69#4> , ...[Classification]Input signals[Function]Ignores a programmed command for...

  • Page 186

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 168 -Parameter1021Subscripts of the axis names of parallel, synchronization control, andtandem control axes[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data ra...

  • Page 187

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 169 -6021Bias set for the tool length compensation number for each axis[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]Fr...

  • Page 188

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 170 -1.8 TANDEM CONTROLGeneralIf sufficient torque cannot be obtained with one motor (when driving alarge table, for example), two motors can be used to produce movementa...

  • Page 189

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 171 -Command pulsePositionloopBuilt-indetectorSeparate detectorScaleAverage?PRM.1815#1PRM. 1952#2PRM. 1879PRM.1980Preload (L)Velocityfeedb...

  • Page 190

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 172 -Explanation- Axis configuration in tandem controlThe limitations below are imposed on axis configuration in tandemcontrol.(1) Up to four sets of tandem control can b...

  • Page 191

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 173 -- Preload functionBy applying an offset to a torque controlled by position (velocity)feedback, tension can be maintained at all times...

  • Page 192

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 174 -- Notes on tandem control stabilityThe key to tandem control stability is that feedback capability isavailable. The feedback capability allows the master to move th...

  • Page 193

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 175 -Parameter- Setting data (parameter)When set for tandem control axes, the parameters to be set for each axisare divided into three typ...

  • Page 194

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 176 -- Parameters that need to be set for the master axis onlyParameter No.Description0012#01004#21005#41005#51022122012211222122312241225122614231424142514271815#11815#5...

  • Page 195

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 177 -- Parameters in which the same data is set for the master axis and slave axisParameter No.Description1012#3-#01005#01005#11005#21005#...

  • Page 196

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 178 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01817TDM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6TDMTDMTDMTDMSpecifies whether to validate tandem control.0: Does not ...

  • Page 197

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 179 -1980Pre-load value for each axis (Tcmd offset)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data](Amplifier limit)/7282[V...

  • Page 198

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 180 -1.9 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROLGeneralWhen one axis is driven by two servo motors as in the case of a largegantry machine, a command for one axis can drive two motorssynchro...

  • Page 199

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 181 -1.9.1 Configuration of Synchronous Control AxesMaster axis and slave axis for synchronous controlAn axis used as the reference for sy...

  • Page 200

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 182 -- Assigning suffixes to axis namesA suffix can be assigned to an axis name; examples are X1, X2, XM,and XS. By assigning a suffix to the same axis name, those axes ...

  • Page 201

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 183 -1.9.2 Synchronous Error CompensationIf a synchronous error which is greater than the zero width value set inparameter No. 1912 occurs...

  • Page 202

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 184 -Kd0AKsBSynchronization errorcompensation gainSynchronization errorA : Synchronous error zero width (parameter No. 1912)B : Synchronous error zero width 2 (parameter ...

  • Page 203

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 185 -1.9.3 Synchronization AlignmentWhen the power is turned on, or the emergency stop state is canceled,the master axis and slave axis un...

  • Page 204

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 186 -Synchronization alignment upon power-upSynchronization upon power-up is established based on manualreference position return or absolute position detection.Until syn...

  • Page 205

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 187 -(2) Grid method (using the reference position proximity signal)The same operation as that for the grid method that does not usethe r...

  • Page 206

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 188 -1.9.4 Synchronous Error CheckA synchronous error is monitored at all times. If an error greater than acertain limit is detected, an alarm is issued, and movement on...

  • Page 207

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 189 -Synchronous error check based on machine coordinatesWhen synchronous error compensation is not applied, a synchronouserror check base...

  • Page 208

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 190 -1.9.5 Recovery from Excessive Synchronous Error AlarmTwo methods of recovery from an excessive synchronous error alarmare available. One uses adjustment mode, and t...

  • Page 209

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 191 -Recovery using normal operationThis method is used if the input signal is used to switch betweensynchronous operation and normal oper...

  • Page 210

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 192 -1.9.6 Torque Difference Alarm Detection for Synchronous ControlIf the master and slave axes move independently under synchronouscontrol, the machine may be damaged. ...

  • Page 211

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 193 -3Read the maximum torque difference absolute values whilenormal operation is underway. Set the threshold parameter to avalue having ...

  • Page 212

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 194 -SignalSynchronous control selection signalSYNC1<G066#2>, SYNC2<G070#2>, ... [Classification]Input signal[Function]Notifies the control unit whether synch...

  • Page 213

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 195 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G066SYNC1G067*ACTF1G158NSYNCAG384*NZ1The above addresses of SYNC1, *ACTF1, and *NZ1 are the signaladdre...

  • Page 214

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 196 -Address bitSymbolSignal nameAxis-specificMasteronlyG0676 VCSKPxVelocity command skip signal¡G0677 SCNTRxSpindle contour control mode switching signal¡G368OVxX7-0Ov...

  • Page 215

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 197 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01010SYC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0SYCSpecifies whether to use the synchronization f...

  • Page 216

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 198 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01803MVBCLPADJ[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1ADJADJADJADJSpecifies the axis along which to move in adjustmen...

  • Page 217

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 199 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01817SYN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1SYNSYNSYNSYNSpecifies whether to exec...

  • Page 218

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 200 -1912Dead zone for the synchronous error on each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]1 - 32767When the ...

  • Page 219

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 201 -1917Synchronous error zero width 2 for an individual axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection uni...

  • Page 220

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 202 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07601SRF[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4SRFSpecifies how the slave axis and master axis operate with G28, G30,and G53 in synchronous c...

  • Page 221

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 203 -7702Master axis number in synchronous control or twin table controlNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must beoff turned...

  • Page 222

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 204 -7724Maximum compensation value in synchronization alignment based onmachine coordinates[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (...

  • Page 223

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 205 -Notice related to axis-type parameter settingAxis-type parameters for axes controlled in synchronization aregrouped into the followin...

  • Page 224

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 206 -(1) Parameters in which the same data must be specified for both the master axis andslave axisNumberMeaning of parameter0012#7Axis detach1005#0Reference position ret...

  • Page 225

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 207 -NumberMeaning of parameter1522Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation time constant (for finishing)1529Feed-forward coefficient...

  • Page 226

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 208 -NumberMeaning of parameter5260Positive-direction coordinate data No.2 for stored stroke limit 1 for an individual axis5261Negative-direction coordinate data No.2 for...

  • Page 227

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 209 -NumberMeaning of parameter1425FL feedrate for a manual reference position return1427External deceleration rate for rapid traverse1430...

  • Page 228

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 210 -NumberMeaning of parameter7717Rotation axis rotation angle offset for head 2 under parallel axis control or twin table control7718Rotation axis origin compensation a...

  • Page 229

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 211 -(4) Parameters in which data must be set only for the slave axisNumberMeaning of parameter1010#0Machine coordinate data-based synchro...

  • Page 230

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 212 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsOT0030SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 1The synchronous error amount is greater than the value setto parameter No. 1914 by the synchrono...

  • Page 231

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 213 -NoteNOTE1 During synchronous operation, the followingoperation results according to the setting of bit 4(SRF) of parameter No. 7601 ...

  • Page 232

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 214 -1.10 TWIN-TABLE CONTROLGeneralIn twin-table control, synchronization operation, single operation, andnormal operation can be switched for two or more specified axes ...

  • Page 233

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 215 -SignalSynchronous control selection signalSYNC1<G066#2>, SYNC2<G070#2>, ...See the description of synchronous control.Par...

  • Page 234

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 216 -7642M code that causes switching to independent operation during twin tablecontrol[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - 999999999Specify...

  • Page 235

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 217 -NoteNOTE1 In synchronization operation, reference position return movement forthe Y axis is also applied to the V axis for an automat...

  • Page 236

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 218 -1.10.1 Tool Length Compensation in Tool Axis Direction with TwinTable ControlOverviewFor a machine that applies twin table control to two heads, tool lengthcompensat...

  • Page 237

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 219 -- Switching between synchronous and independent operation usingsynchronization control select signals SYNCxUse synchronization contro...

  • Page 238

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 220 -- Switching between synchronous and independent operation using themiscellaneous functionSpecify the program command miscellaneous function in a single blockto switc...

  • Page 239

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 221 -Restrictions- Changing the tool length compensation value along the tool axisThe tool length compensation value along the tool axis c...

  • Page 240

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 222 -SignalsSynchronization control select signalsSYNC1<G066#2>, SYNC2<G070#2>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Function]Notifies the control unit of synchron...

  • Page 241

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 223 -Parameters- Parameter for enabling this function#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07540TWN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2...

  • Page 242

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 224 -- Parameters related to a twin tableParameter numberData typeDescription7702IntegeraxisMaster axis number7633IntegerM code for turning synchronization off7634Integer...

  • Page 243

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 225 -NOTE1 If parameter settings conflict with each other, the movementof the machine may differ from the expected movement.Carefully read...

  • Page 244

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 226 -1.11 CHOPPING FUNCTIONGeneralWhen contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can beused to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function,w...

  • Page 245

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 227 -- Chopping activated by signal inputBefore chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position,upper dead point, lower dead point, and c...

  • Page 246

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 228 -- Chopping setting screenA chopping axis, point R, top dead point, bottom dead point, andchopping rate can be specified on the chopping screen. Point R, a topdead ...

  • Page 247

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 229 -(1) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from theupper dead point to the lower dead pointNew upper dead pointPrevious upper dead po...

  • Page 248

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 230 -(3) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from thelower dead point to the upper dead pointNew upper dead pointPrevious upper dead pointPrevious lower ...

  • Page 249

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 231 -- Chopping delay compensation functionWhen high-speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servodelay and acceleration/deceleration dela...

  • Page 250

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 232 -- Bottom dead point overshoot damp controlBottom dead point overshoot damp control is enabled when thechopping rate (command-specified rate overridden with a certai...

  • Page 251

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 233 -- Reset during choppingWhen a reset is performed during chopping, the tool immediatelymoves to point R, after which chopping mode is canceled.If an...

  • Page 252

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 234 -- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolationFor a chopping axis, look-ahead acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation is not applicable.ExampleG90...

  • Page 253

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 235 -SignalsChopping hold signal*CHLD<G044#7>[Classification]InputSignals[Function]Stops chopping.[Operation]When this signal is set to 0, the CNC...

  • Page 254

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 236 -Chopping feedrate override signals*CHP1-*CHP8<G044#0-#3>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Overrides the chopping feedrate.[Operation]The actual feedrate du...

  • Page 255

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 237 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G044*CHLDCHPST*CHP8*CHP4*CHP2*CHP1F157CHPCYL CHPMDParameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01001CAF[Input type]Setting input[Data type...

  • Page 256

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 238 -1193Upper limit for chopping[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (input unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system...

  • Page 257

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 239 -1197Maximum feedrate during chopping[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum...

  • Page 258

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 240 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0472ILL-COMMAND IN G81.1 MODEEither G81.1 was instructed again while in the choppingmode, or a move instruction was issued to...

  • Page 259

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 241 -1.12 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOXOverviewThis function rotates a workpiece in synchronization with a rotatingtool, or moves a tool in synchronization with a...

  • Page 260

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 242 -Specify the slave-axis travel in either of the following ways.1.Slave-axis travelβj : Slave-axis addressj:Slave-axis travel indicated in units of the minimumtravel ...

  • Page 261

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 243 -- Synchronization end1.Canceling synchronization for each axis by issuing a commandWith a G80.5 0 command, synchronization is canceled.is the addr...

  • Page 262

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 244 -1.12.2 Description of Commands Compatible with Those for aHobbing MachineA command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used asa synchronization command...

  • Page 263

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 245 -Explanation- Synchronization startSpecify P and Q to use helical gear compensation.In this case, if only one of P and Q is specified, an alarm (PS0...

  • Page 264

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 246 -- Helical gear compensationFor a helical gear, the workpiece axis is subjected to compensation formovement along the Z axis (axial feed axis) according to the twiste...

  • Page 265

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 247 -- Compensation direction in helical gear compensationParameter HDR (bit 2 of No. 7612)When the HDR bit is set to 1+CC : +, Z : +, P : +Compensation...

  • Page 266

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 248 -1.12.3 Configuration Examples of Controlled Axes- Gear grinderSpindle: EGB master axis serving as a tool axisFirst axis: XSecond axis : YThird axis: C axis (EGB slav...

  • Page 267

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 249 -- Dressing exampleWhen the following configuration is used in a gear grinderLimit switch 1Limit switch 2V-axismotorU axisV axisRotating grinding wh...

  • Page 268

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 250 -NOTEIf the V-axis (linear axis) is synchronized with thespindle as in the case of dressing, the range ofmovement of the V-axis is determined by the rotationof the sp...

  • Page 269

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 251 -1.12.4 Retraction Function- Retraction function caused by an external signalWhen retract signal RTRCT is set to 1 (on the rising edge of the signal...

  • Page 270

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 252 -- Flowchart of retraction function processing by a servo or spindle alarmServo axis out of orderServo amplifier errorStart deceleration stop for spindle : PMCSpindle...

  • Page 271

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 253 -1.12.5 Automatic Phase Matching Function with Electronic Gear BoxIn the EGB (electronic gear box), when synchronization start orcancellation is spe...

  • Page 272

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 254 -Explanation- Acceleration/deceleration type1.Specify G81R1 to start synchronization.When G81R1 is specified, acceleration is performed on theworkpiece axis (slave ax...

  • Page 273

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 255 -- Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase matching type1.Move the workpiece axis to the position that corresponds to thatof the one-rotation...

  • Page 274

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 256 - CAUTIONAutomatic phase matching, specify the speed in parameter No. 5984and the movement direction in parameter PHD, bit 1 of No. 7712.In phase matching, rapid-trav...

  • Page 275

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 257 -SignalRetract signalRTRCT<G042#4>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Retracts along the axis specified in the parameter.[Operation]When thi...

  • Page 276

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 258 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G042RTRCTF041RTRCTFF066EGBM1The above EGBM1 address corresponds to the first-axis signal address.For details of the signal addresses fo...

  • Page 277

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 259 -Note the following points when specifying parameters for theelectronic gear box.1.Arrange the controlled axes such that a slave axis appears before...

  • Page 278

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 260 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01004DSP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6DSPDSPDSPDSPSpecifies whether to display axis positions in the positi...

  • Page 279

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 261 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01955EGB[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0EGBEGBEGBEGBSpecifies the axis on which to perform ...

  • Page 280

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 262 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07612HDRRSH[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0RSHRSHRSHRSHSpecifies whether to cancel the synchronous mode (G81, G81...

  • Page 281

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 263 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07712PHDPHS[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0PHSPHSPHSPHSSpecifies whether to perform acceleratio...

  • Page 282

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 264 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07711EHF[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6EHFEHFEHFEHFSpecifies whether feed-forward control on the axial feed axis...

  • Page 283

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 265 -5997Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection...

  • Page 284

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 266 -(Example 2)If the spindle-to-detector gear ratio is changed to 2/3 in the above example (threespindle rotations for two detector rotations)In this case, the number o...

  • Page 285

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 267 -5995Axis number of an axis to be synchronized using the method of commandspecification for a hobbing machine[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]I...

  • Page 286

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 268 -5984Speed for workpiece-axis automatic phase alignment[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]degree/min[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment...

  • Page 287

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 269 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0593EGB PARAMETER SETTINGERRORErroneous EGB parameter setting(1) The setting of SYN parameter No. 1955#0 is...

  • Page 288

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 270 -1.13 EGB AXIS SKIP FUNCTIONGeneralIn the synchronization mode supported by an electronic gear box(EGB), this function enables a skip signal or high-speed skip signal...

  • Page 289

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 271 -SignalFor the skip signal, see Section 14.5.Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07200HSS[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4HSSSpecifies whether to...

  • Page 290

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 272 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#072109S89S79S69S59S49S39S29S1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit 9S1 to 9S8A skip signal to be used for G31.8 (EGB skip command) is set.Corre...

  • Page 291

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 273 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0114VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGEAn illegal No. was specified in a local variable, commonvariable or a system v...

  • Page 292

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 274 -1.14 TURNING MODE AND COMPENSATION CLAMP OF DUALPOSITION FEEDBACKOverviewFor axes controlled by the dual position feedback function, turningmode and compensation cla...

  • Page 293

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 275 -SignalsDual position feedback turning mode select signalHBTRN <G008#4>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Selects turning mode.[Operation]W...

  • Page 294

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 276 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01930STH[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit axis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0STHSTHSTHSTHTurning mode of dual position feedback is:0: Disabled.1:...

  • Page 295

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 277 -1.15 DECELERATION STOP AT POWER FAILUREOverviewIf a power failure occurs during axis movement, this functiondecelerates and stops the tool accordin...

  • Page 296

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 278 -SignalPower failure deceleration signal PWFL <G159#3> [Classification]Input signal [Function]Posts the detection of a power failure. [Operation]When this signa...

  • Page 297

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 279 -1.16 HIGH SPEED HRV MODEOverviewHigher speed and higher precision HIGH SPEED HRV control can beperformed by using the servo control card, the servo...

  • Page 298

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 280 -RestrictionsHIGH SPEED HRV mode is disabled under any of the followingconditions, even if an attempt is made to turn it on:-Automatic operation is stopped- PMC axis ...

  • Page 299

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 281 -Diagnosis- HIGH SPEED HRV statusThe HIGH SPEED HRV status can be checked using diagnostic data.#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03022HRVOK HRVONFirst axis: 3022Seco...

  • Page 300

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 282 -1.17 SETUP OF FSSBs IF USING HIGH SPEED HRV CONTROLIt is possible to use HIGH SPEED HRV control for up to eight axes (24axes for systems having 11 or more controlled...

  • Page 301

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 283 -- Example 2 (using two FSSBs: HIGH SPEED HRV control can be used if the numberof controlled axes is eight or less.)If two optical fiber cables are...

  • Page 302

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 284 -Display of FSSB dataThe slave numbers on the amplifier setup screen each consist of anumber that indicates an FSSB (either 1 or 2), a hyphen (-), and thenumber of th...

  • Page 303

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 285 -Parameters1120Address translation table value (ATR) for slave 1 (second FSSB)1121Address translation table value (ATR) for slave 2 (second FSSB)112...

  • Page 304

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 286 -NOTE1 A total of up to ten slave units (eight amplifiers and two Separate DetectorI/F Units) can be connected to the first and second FSSBs. (For systemshaving 11 o...

  • Page 305

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 287 -NotesNOTERequirements for performing HIGH SPEED HRV controlIf HIGH SPEED HRV control is to be used, the system must satisfy the followingrequiremen...

  • Page 306

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 288 -1.18 LOADING OF MULTIPLE SERVO PROGRAMSOverviewThis function allows two or more servo programs of a standard andapplication series to be stored in FROM at the same t...

  • Page 307

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 289 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageDescriptionSV0455SERVO SOFTWARE NOT FOUNDThe specified servo program cannot be found.The setting of parameter No. 104...

  • Page 308

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 290 -1.19 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACTOverviewWhen the retract signal RTRCT is turned to ”1” (the rising edge isdetected) in auto mode or manual mode, the axis moves (retr...

  • Page 309

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 291 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G042RTRCT#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F041BFRTRCTFTiming chart(1) ON/OFF timing of RTRCT and RTRCTF signalsRTRCTRTRCTFMoving ...

  • Page 310

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 292 -Parameter7796Retract amount[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real axis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment ...

  • Page 311

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 293 -NOTE1 Interlock is supported for retracting.2 Machine lock is supported for retracting. Retract completionsignal is output when retract operation i...

  • Page 312

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 294 -2 PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

  • Page 313

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 295 -2.1 EMERGENCY STOPIf you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel,the machine movement stops in a moment.Figure 2.1 (a) Emergency stopFor how to us...

  • Page 314

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 296 -*ESPEmergency stopSAResetReset caused by an emergency stop*ESPEmergency stopSAResetAlarm issued upon an emergency*ESP, RRW, reset keyFig. 2.1(b) Differences between the Causing of a Re...

  • Page 315

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 297 -Fig. 2.1 (c) Connection of emergency stop limit switchThe distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied tothat where the tool stops moving is given in...

  • Page 316

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 298 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G000*ESPParameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02001ENR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ENRENRENRENRAt emergency stop:0: The system is...

  • Page 317

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 299 -2.2 READY SIGNALSOverviewThe ready signals are set to 1 when the power to the CNC is turned onand operation is ready.SignalCNC Ready SignalMA<F000#7>[Classificat...

  • Page 318

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 300 -Fig. 2.2 (a) Time chart for servo ready signalSignal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F000MASANOTEIn the servo off state, the servo system is notoperating, that is, position control is not appli...

  • Page 319

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 301 -2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK2.3.1 Overtravel SignalOverviewWhen the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machinetool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stop...

  • Page 320

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 302 -The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel. (i) Rapid traverseTRt2t1VR*+Lα limitswitchCommand pulsedecelerationServo systemdelaytVL1=VR(t1+t2+TR/2+TS)-1/6000 [mm, inch...

  • Page 321

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 303 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G064*-L1*+L1The above address is the signal address for the first axis.For the signal addresses for the second axis and subsequent axes, ...

  • Page 322

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 304 -2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1GeneralWhen the tool tries to exceed a stored stroke check, an alarm isdisplayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped.When the tool enters a forbidden area...

  • Page 323

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 305 -Stroke check release signal RLSOT<G172#1> [Classification]Input signal [Function]Selects whether the stored stroke check 1 are checked. [Operation]When this sign...

  • Page 324

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 306 -5220Positive (+) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 1 of each axis I[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of ...

  • Page 325

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 307 -5261Coordinate II along each axis in the minus direction of stored stroke limit 1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine ...

  • Page 326

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 308 -2.3.3 Stroke Check 2GeneralThree areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with storedstroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3.Figure 2.3.3 (a) Stroke c...

  • Page 327

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 309 -When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the figurebelow must be set.B(X2,Y2,Z2)A (X1,Y1,Z1)X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2X1-X2>ζY1-Y2>ζZ1-Z2>ζ...

  • Page 328

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 310 -- Forbidden area over lappingArea can be set in piles.Forbidden area ofstroke limit check 1Forbidden area ofstroke limit check 2 Fig. 2.3.3 (e) Setting the forbidden area over lappingU...

  • Page 329

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 311 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05200OUT[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0OUTOUTOUTOUTSpecifies whether to use the interior or exterior of sto...

  • Page 330

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 312 -5223Negative (-) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 2 of each axis[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data...

  • Page 331

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 313 -2.3.4 Stroke Limit Check Prior to Performing MovementGeneralDuring automatic operation, before the movement specified by a givenblock is started, whether the tool ente...

  • Page 332

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 314 -Limitations- Manual numeric commandFor manual numeric commands, no stroke limit check is made beforemovement.- Machine lockIf machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke...

  • Page 333

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 315 -- Polar coordinate interpolation modeIn polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made.- Three-dimensional coordinate conversionIn three-dimensional coordinate ...

  • Page 334

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 316 -2.4 ALARM SIGNALSOverviewWhen the CNC placed in the alarm state, an alarm is displayed on thescreen, and the alarm-on signal is set to 1. The alarm type signalcorresponding to the type...

  • Page 335

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 317 -All-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signalDVAL<G026#1>See the description of the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal in Section2.8.Battery voltage drop alarm signalBATL<F...

  • Page 336

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 318 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08000NAP[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1NAPNAPNAPNAPSpecifies whether to switch the screen display to the alarm messagescreen ...

  • Page 337

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 319 -2.5 INTERLOCKGeneralThis signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal isinput during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated,then stoppe...

  • Page 338

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 320 -NOTEThe overtravel amount of the motor after turning *ITto "0" is represented by the following formula.Qmax = Fm×1/60× (A/1000+Tc/1000+Ts/1000)Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm...

  • Page 339

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 321 -(b) In automatic operation (MEM DNC or MDI mode)(Manualarbitrary direction feed)If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded(the move amount is not ...

  • Page 340

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 322 -Cutting block start interlock signal*CSL<G000#1>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Disables the start of the execution of move command blocks other thanpositioning blocks in au...

  • Page 341

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 323 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01000XIK[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2XIKXIKXIKXIKWhen axis interlock is applied during non-linear interpolationp...

  • Page 342

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 324 -2.6 MODE SELECTIONOverviewThe mode selection signals set the basic operation modes of the controlunit. The mode selection signals include input signals used by anexternal device to not...

  • Page 343

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 325 -Explanations- Operation mode selectionWhen an input signal is set to 1, the corresponding operation mode isselected. While a mode is selected, the corresponding outpu...

  • Page 344

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 326 -- Operation upon operation mode switchingUpon a transition from one operation mode to another, the control unitusually performs one of the operations below.a.Immediate switching:Operati...

  • Page 345

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 327 -DNC operation selection signalT <G003#4>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Selects DNC operation mode. Automatic operation is performedaccording to programmed...

  • Page 346

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 328 -Manual arbitrary-direction feed selection signalAGJ <G003#7>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Selects manual arbitrary-direction feed mode. Manual arbitrary-direction feed is...

  • Page 347

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 329 -Jog feed selection confirmation signalMJ <F003#2>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Indicates that jog feed mode is selected.[Output condition]See "Oper...

  • Page 348

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 330 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02001MOC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1MOCMOCMOCMOCIf all the mode selection signals are turned off:0: No mode is assumed.1...

  • Page 349

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 331 -2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNALGeneralThe table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state ofthe CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of ...

  • Page 350

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 332 -2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNALGeneralThe German VDE safety standard requires that the motor bedeactivated when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFFalarm ignore signal, h...

  • Page 351

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 333 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01800IVOSAK[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6SAKSAKSAKSAKSpecifies whether to change the state of the servo ...

  • Page 352

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 334 -Caution CAUTION1 If a reset is caused while DVALn or DVAL is set to 1when bit 7 (IVO) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 0,the reset state is not cleared until DVALn or DVAL isset to 1. T...

  • Page 353

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 335 -2.9 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTIONOverviewWhen the machine collides, or if a defective or damaged tool is used, aload torque greater than that applied in normal feed and cutt...

  • Page 354

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 336 -Parameter settingThe method of setting the parameters to use the abnormal loaddetection function is described below.(1) Servo axisNoYesThe abnormal load detectionfunction is available.I...

  • Page 355

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 337 -SignalServo axis abnormal load detection signal AQSV<F155#3>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Notifies the PMC of an abnormal load detected on the servo axi...

  • Page 356

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 338 -NOTENo spindle axis subject to speed control can bestopped from the CNC.If necessary, stop a spindle axis subject to speedcontrol from the PMC by using output signal AQSPn(n = 1 to 4).S...

  • Page 357

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 339 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01957TDO[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5TDOTDOTDOTDOSpecifies which to output to the check board for each axis....

  • Page 358

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 340 -1996Retract amount on detecting an irregular load[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]0 - 32767If an abnormal load is detected,...

  • Page 359

    B-63783EN-1/01 2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION- 341 -Spindle parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#03015SPM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1SPMSPMSPMSPMSpecify if the monitoring function of t...

  • Page 360

    2.PREAPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 342 -3250Observer gain 2 for monitoring the spindle load (for the main side)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]0 - 32767The standard set value is 500.3341T...

  • Page 361

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 343 -3 MANUAL OPERATION

  • Page 362

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 344 -3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEEDGeneral- Jog feedIn the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to "1"on the machine operator's panel continuous...

  • Page 363

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 345 -Feed Axis and Direction Selection Signal+J1<G65#0>, +J2<G69#0>, ... , -J1<G65#1>, -J2<G69#1>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Func...

  • Page 364

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 346 -NOTE3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis anddirection selection signals are set to "1" or if a feedaxis and direction signal turns to "1" ...

  • Page 365

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 347 -*JV0-*JV15 12 8 4 0Override value(%)1 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1010 1100 0000 0001 1111 1111 1111 1111 1001 0000 0110 0000 0001 1111 1...

  • Page 366

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 348 - WARNINGAfter the power is turned on, the stroke limit functiondoes not work until the reference position return iscompleted. During this period, the control unitignores t...

  • Page 367

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 349 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G006RTG014*JV7*JV6*JV5*JV4*JV3*JV2*JV1*JV0G015*JV15*JV14*JV13*JV12*JV11*JV10*JV9*JV8G020DIST7DIST6DIST5DIST4DIST3DIST2DIST1D...

  • Page 368

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 350 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01400RPD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2RPDRPDRPDRPDSpecifies whether manual rapid traverse can be performed du...

  • Page 369

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 351 -1625FL feedrate for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during jog feed[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, d...

  • Page 370

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 352 -NoteNOTETime constant and method of automaticacceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverseare the same as G00 in programmed command.Reference itemII-3.2Jog feedSerie...

  • Page 371

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 353 -3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEEDGeneralIn the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved byrotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along ...

  • Page 372

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 354 -Manual handle feed axis selectionHSnD HSnC HSnB HSnAFeed axis0000000100100011010001010110011110001001101010111100110111101111No selection (None of axis is fed)1st axis2nd a...

  • Page 373

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 355 -Manual handle feed amountselection signalMP4MP2MP1Distance traveled (increment feed)000011110011001101010101Least input increment x 1Least input increment...

  • Page 374

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 356 -Parameter1413Maximum number of buffered manual handle feed pulses[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 4The permissible flow amount is set. If...

  • Page 375

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 357 -1418Magnification n of manual handle feed[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 2000Set the magnification rate for when moveme...

  • Page 376

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 358 -3.3 MANUAL HANDLE CONNECTED TO I/O LINKGeneralInstead of an ordinary manual handle connected to the main CPU board,a manual handle connected to the I/O Link (operator's pan...

  • Page 377

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 359 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02070IH3IH2IH1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0IH1IH1IH1IH1Specifies whether to use an I/O-Lin...

  • Page 378

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 360 -2071Address value of the first I/O-Link-connected manual handleNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for the setting to become...

  • Page 379

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 361 -2073Address value of the third I/O-Link-connected manual handleNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for the...

  • Page 380

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 362 -3.4 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTIONGeneralRotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation canincrease the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to thehand...

  • Page 381

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 363 -3.5 THREE-DIMENSIONAL HANDLE FEEDThree-dimensional handle feed includes three special handle feedmodes, a function for changing the tool length...

  • Page 382

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 364 -Handle feed interruption in the longitudinal direction of the toolIn tool axis direction handle feed, the tool is moved in the tool axisdirection by the rotation of the man...

  • Page 383

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 365 -- Rotary axes B and C (with the Z-axis representing the tool axis)BZXYHpCXpYpZpXp=Hp×sin(B)×cos(C)Yp=Hp×sin(B)×sin(C)Zp=Hp×cos(B)- Rotary ...

  • Page 384

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 366 -- Rotary axes A and B (with the X-axis representing the tool axis)BXYZHpAYpZpXpXp=Hp×cos(B)Yp=Hp×sin(B)×sin(A)Zp= -Hp×sin(B)×cos(A)- Rotary axes A and B (with the A-ax...

  • Page 385

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 367 -- Rotation axes A and B (with the B-axis being the master axis and the Z-axisrepresenting the tool axis)ZYXAXpYpZpHpzHpz : Hp when the machine ...

  • Page 386

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 368 -- Pulses distributed to each axisWhen handle feed/interruption in the transverse direction of the tool isperformed, pulses are distributed to the axes according to the mach...

  • Page 387

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 369 -- Rotation axes A and C (with the Z-axis representing the tool axis)-When handle feed is performed in the transverse direction of thetool (in t...

  • Page 388

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 370 -- Rotation axes A and B (with the X-axis representing the tool axis)-When handle feed is performed in the transverse direction of thetool (in the Y-axis direction)XYZAYpZpW...

  • Page 389

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 371 -Rotational Handle Feed Around the Center of the Tool TipSelect the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tooltip and rotate t...

  • Page 390

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 372 -- Rotation axes B and C (with the Z-axis representing the tool axis)BZXYT1CT2CpBpYpZpXpT1 :Tool rotation center positionT2 :Tool rotation center position after movementBp, ...

  • Page 391

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 373 -- Rotation axes A and B (with the X-axis representing the tool axis)BXYZT1AT2ApBpZpXpYpT1 : Tool rotation center positionT2 : Tool ro...

  • Page 392

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 374 -Tool holder offsetThe length unique to the machine tool from the rotation center of arotary axis (A and B axes, A and C axes, B and C axes) around whichthe tool axis rotate...

  • Page 393

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 375 -Precautions during 3-dimensional handle feed / interruption function(1) Interruption by 3-dimensional handle feed/interruption function iseffec...

  • Page 394

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 376 -(3) Tool direction X axis, rotary axes A and B axesWorkpieceBAZYXAB(4) Tool direction Z axis, rotary axes A and B axes (A-axis master)BAZXYWorkpieceAB

  • Page 395

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 377 - (5) Tool direction Z axis, rotary axes A and B axes (B-axis master)BAZYXWorkpieceBA(4) Only the first manual pulse generator can be used in th...

  • Page 396

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 378 -Three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt in parallel axis control and twin tablecontrol- Procedure for three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt on a machine that controlstwo ...

  • Page 397

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 379 -Y1X1Z1Y2Z2X2Second combinationFirst combinationA2B2B1A1Setting example 2) For twin table controlAxis nameParameter(No.7543)X3Y1V2W2Z1I0B1J2C1K...

  • Page 398

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 380 -Three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt setting for the head of thesecond combinationParameterType of three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt7753Tool axis right-angle direc...

  • Page 399

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 381 -- Parallel axis control and twin table control operations[Case 1]When three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt is performedwith the two heads sy...

  • Page 400

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 382 -SignalTool axis direction handle feed mode signal ALNGH <G156#0>[Classification]Input signal[Function]This signal selects tool axis direction handle feed mode.[Operat...

  • Page 401

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 383 -Tool axis direction tool length compensation amount modification handle mode signalCNGTL<G156#3> [Classification]Input signal [Function]S...

  • Page 402

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 384 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01014RAPRAM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0RAMRAMRAMRAMSpecifies whether to use the axis as the rotation ax...

  • Page 403

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 385 -1029Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - Max a...

  • Page 404

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 386 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02202DTL[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2DTLDTLDTLDTLSpecifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed o...

  • Page 405

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 387 -7515Master rotation axis number[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - Max axesWhen a machine does not have the rota...

  • Page 406

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 388 -7516Angular displacement of a rotation axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the app...

  • Page 407

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 389 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07540ETHDTH[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6DTHDTHDTHDTHSpecifies whether to include or excl...

  • Page 408

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 390 -7551Value set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the firstmanual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction in tool axis normaldirection handle f...

  • Page 409

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 391 -7552Value set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the firstmanual handle pulse generator in the second axis direction in tool...

  • Page 410

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 392 -7555Value set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the firstmanual handle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other than the toolaxis direction in ...

  • Page 411

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 393 -7557Distance from the center of tool rotation to the tool tip[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (machine unit)[Mini...

  • Page 412

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 394 -- Parameters under parallel axis control and twin table control#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07540PHH[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1PHHPHHPHHPHHSpeci...

  • Page 413

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 395 -Data No.Head 1Head 2Description75527754Value set for the manual handle feed axis selectionsignals for the first manual pulse generator in these...

  • Page 414

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 396 -7716Angular displacement of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis controland twin table control[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Min...

  • Page 415

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 397 -7753Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the firstmanual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction fo...

  • Page 416

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 398 -7755Value to be set for the handle feed axis selection signals for the first manualhandle pulse generator for tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2in parallel...

  • Page 417

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 399 -7757Value to be set for the handle feed axis selection signals for the first manualhandle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other tha...

  • Page 418

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 400 -7758Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the firstmanual handle pulse generator for modification to the tool axis direction toollength comp...

  • Page 419

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 401 -7760Tool holder offset value for tool axis direction tool length compensation ofhead 2 in parallel axis control and twin table control[Input ty...

  • Page 420

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 402 -3.5.1 Control Point Compensation in Three-dimensional HandleFeedOverviewControl point compensation in three-dimensional handle feed permitsthree-dimensional handle feed eve...

  • Page 421

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 403 -Similarly, tool direction tool length compensation and tool headposition control are possible with "control point compensation in toolleng...

  • Page 422

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 404 -- If the rotation axis is B or C (the tool direction is Z)BZXYT1CT2CpBpYpZpXpT1: Tool's center-of-rotation positionT2: Tool's center-of-rotation position after movementBp...

  • Page 423

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 405 -- If the rotation axis is A or C (the tool direction is Z)AZXYT1CT2CpApYpZpXpT1: Tool's center-of-rotation positionT2: Tool's center-of-rotat...

  • Page 424

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 406 -- If the rotation axis is A or B (the tool direction is X)BXYZT1AT2ApBpZpXpYpT1: Tool's center-of-rotation positionT2: Tool's center-of-rotation position after movementAp...

  • Page 425

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 407 -- If the rotation axis is A or B (axis A is the master and the tool direction is Z)ZYXBAXpZpYpT1: Tool's center-of-rotation positionT2: Tool'...

  • Page 426

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 408 -- If the rotation axis is A or B (axis B is the master and the tool direction is Z)ZAXpZpBYXT1T2YpA+ApB+BpT1: Tool's center-of-rotation positionT2: Tool's center-of-rotat...

  • Page 427

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 409 -Tool head coordinate displayThe absolute coordinates of the tool head that result from control pointcompensation in tool direction handle feed,...

  • Page 428

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 410 -- Formulas for tool head coordinate display for each machine configuration(1) If the rotation axis is B or C and the tool direction is Zúúúûùêêêëé−÷÷÷øöç...

  • Page 429

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 411 -Parameters- Parameters related to control point compensation7519Center-of-rotation compensation vector for tool direction tool lengthcompensati...

  • Page 430

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 412 - # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5SVCSVCSVCSVCIn the tool direction tool length compensation function, tool head positioncontrol function, and three-dimensional handle feed funct...

  • Page 431

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 413 -7745Shift vector for tool direction tool length compensation[Input section]Parameter input[Data type]Real axis type[Unit of data]mm, inch (mach...

  • Page 432

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 414 -3.6 MANUAL INTERRUPTION FUNCTION FOR THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSIONWhen the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the three-dimensional coordinate con...

  • Page 433

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 415 -Explanations- InterruptionThis function performs interruption only when all the conditions in 1 to8 are met.1 During simultaneous manual and au...

  • Page 434

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 416 -SignalThree-dimensional coordinate conversion manual interrupt enable/disable switch signalNOT3DM<G157#7>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Enables or disables the...

  • Page 435

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 417 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02208DMK[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0DMKDMKDMKDMKSpecifies whether the manual o...

  • Page 436

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 418 -3.7 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMANDGeneralThe manual numeric command function allows data programmed byMDI to be executed in the jog mode. Whenever the system is ready forjog feed, ...

  • Page 437

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 419 -- Linear interpolation (G01)The amount of travel is given as a numeric value, preceded by anaddress such as X, Y or Z. This is always regarded ...

  • Page 438

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 420 -NOTEThe 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference position returnfunction is optional. If this option is not selected, thewarning "FORMAT ERROR" is generated, and G30cannot be e...

  • Page 439

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 421 -- Jog feedWhen a manual numeric command is specified while the tool is beingmoved along an axis by using a feed axis and direction selection sw...

  • Page 440

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 422 -3.8 MANUAL ARBITRARY-ANGLE FEEDThis function allows a tool to be manually moved in any direction inany plane. Since the feedrate, feed direction, and feed plane can bechan...

  • Page 441

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 423 -SignalThe signals listed below are used with manual arbitrary-angle feed.Type of selectionSignal symbolMode selectionAGJ,-AGJSelection of axes ...

  • Page 442

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 424 -To perform manual arbitrary-angle feed on the XY plane (X-axis: Firstcontrolled axis, Y-axis: Second controlled axis), for example, makethe following selection:AJP2DAJP2C...

  • Page 443

    B-63783EN-1/01 3.MANUAL OPERATION- 425 -Manual arbitrary-angle feed signal +AJ<G017#5>, -AJ<G017#6>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Moves the tool by manual arbitrary...

  • Page 444

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 426 -Parameter1411Arbitrary manual angle feedrate[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incre...

  • Page 445

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 427 -4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT

  • Page 446

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 428 -4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURNGeneralThe tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 ofNo. 1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction selectsignal ...

  • Page 447

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 429 -(6) Upon confirmation that the current position is in the in-positionarea, the reference position return end signal (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3,0)and the reference position establishment si...

  • Page 448

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 430 -Installation conditions for deceleration limit switchWhen installing the deceleration limit switch for manual referenceposition return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:*DEC1Gr...

  • Page 449

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 431 -Servo position error and one-rotation signalTo perform manual reference position return when the referenceposition has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual...

  • Page 450

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 432 -SignalManual reference position return selection signalZRN <G002#7>[Classification]Input Signal[Function]This signal selects manual reference position return.Manual reference position ...

  • Page 451

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 433 -Feed Axis and Direction Selection SignalFor details about this signal, see "Feed Axis and Direction SelectionSignal" in Sec. 3.1. Here, only notes on use of referenc...

  • Page 452

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 434 -Reference position return deceleration signals*DEC1<G64#5>, *DEC2<G68#5>, ...[Classification]Input Signal[Function]These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference posi...

  • Page 453

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 435 -Reference position return end signalsZP1<F64#0>, ZP2<F68#0>, ...[Classification]Output Signal [Function]These signals report that the tool is at the reference posit...

  • Page 454

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 436 -Second reference position return end signals ZP21<F64#1>, ZP22<F68#1>, ...Third reference position return end signals ZP31<F64#4>, ZP32<F68#4>, ...Fourth reference po...

  • Page 455

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 437 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00002SJZ[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # # # # 7777SJZSJZSJZSJZManual reference position return:0: Performs reference position r...

  • Page 456

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 438 - # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3PLZPLZPLZPLZSpecifies the condition for presetting the work coordinate system whenmanual reference position return is performed.0: Preset only when in reset state...

  • Page 457

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 439 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01200NZA[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6NZANZANZANZASpecifies whether to issue the PS181 alarm if the machine is in the lock...

  • Page 458

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 440 -1417Rapid traverse ratio during the period from the power on to manualreference position return[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]%[Valid data range]0 - 100Set the ra...

  • Page 459

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 441 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0181ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHEDA move instruction was issued to an axis in which the zeroreturn instruction was instructed once after the p...

  • Page 460

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 442 -4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGSGeneralOn a machine tool equipped with an absolute-position detector, thisfunction makes a movement by jog feed to a point near a referenceposi...

  • Page 461

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 443 -The following figure shows the positional relation between thereference position and the point to which the tool is positioned bymanual continuous feed.Servo position error and...

  • Page 462

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 444 -Reference position resettingThe controlled axis for which parameter GRD (bit 6 of parameter No.1007) is 0 can be used to set up the reference position any number oftimes without turning the ...

  • Page 463

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 445 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0181ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHEDA move instruction was issued to an axis in which the zeroreturn instruction was instructed once after the p...

  • Page 464

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 446 -4.3 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFTGeneralWhen reference position return is performed using a grid method, thereference position can be shifted by a parameter-set distance withouthaving to move the...

  • Page 465

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 447 -4 In subsequent reference position return, the machine stops at thereference position.- Adjustment procedure using the reference position adjustment signal1 Set the parameters...

  • Page 466

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 448 -SignalReference position adjustment signalRAST1<G67#2>, RAST2<G71#2>, ...[Classification]Input Signal[Function]Automatically sets a reference position shift amount in grid-basedr...

  • Page 467

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 449 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01008SFD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4SFDSFDSFDSFDSpecifies whether to enable the reference position shift fu...

  • Page 468

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 450 -Alarm And message- Diagnosis display3008Display of the distance to the first grid pointafter the deceleration dog is turned off[Data type]Real axis[Unit of data]machine unitCaution CAUTION1 ...

  • Page 469

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 451 -4.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURNGeneralThe G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via thespecified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets theco...

  • Page 470

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 452 -1240Coordinates of the first reference position in the machine coordinate system[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of da...

  • Page 471

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 453 -4.5 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/3RD, 4THREFERENCE POSITION RETURNGeneralThe G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th referenceposition, via the specified interm...

  • Page 472

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 454 -- Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F064ZP41ZP31ZP21The address above is the signal address for the first axis.For the signal addresses for the second axis and subsequent axes, seethe address ta...

  • Page 473

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 455 -1243Coordinates of the fourth reference positionin the machine coordinate system[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Mini...

  • Page 474

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 456 -4.6 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURNGeneralIt is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position bycommanding the G30.1.The floating reference position is located on the mac...

  • Page 475

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 457 -SignalFloating reference position return end signal FRP1<F65#5>, FRP2<F69#5>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]Notify the system that the tool is at the fl...

  • Page 476

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 458 -1244Floating reference position in G30.1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the...

  • Page 477

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 459 -4.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH REFERENCE MARKSGeneralA scale having reference marks at constantly varying intervals can becreated by combining two virtual scales with different one-rota...

  • Page 478

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 460 -The timing chart for the basic procedure is shown below:Fig. 4.7 (b) Timing Chart of Operation for Establishing a Reference PositionProcedure for establishing a reference position through a...

  • Page 479

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 461 -SignalReference position establishment signalsZRF1<F65#2>, ZRF2<F69#2>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]The signal indicates whether a reference position ...

  • Page 480

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 462 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01002DC4[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3DC4DC4DC4DC4Specifies how to establish a reference position for a linear scale havingrefe...

  • Page 481

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 463 -1896Capacity of the reference counter for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]0 - 999999999In case of using ...

  • Page 482

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 464 -5227Distance between the origin of the linear scale having reference marks andthe reference position[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data r...

  • Page 483

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 465 -Parameter No.5227 (reference position) = Position of A + 5.0= {(Distance of position A and position B)/(Interval of the mark1 – Interval of the mark2)} * (Interval of the m...

  • Page 484

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 466 -Caution CAUTION1 In the following cases, the operation for establishing a reference position is notperformed, but movement to the reference position occurs:- If axial movement is made in REF...

  • Page 485

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 467 -NoteNOTE1 If an automatic reference position return (G28) isspecified before a reference position is established,the operation for establishing a reference position isperformed...

  • Page 486

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 468 -4.7.1 Enhancement of Distance Coded Linear ScaleOverviewThe distance coded linear scale interface can now be used for thefollowing controlled axes:Rotation axisSynchronization control axisPM...

  • Page 487

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 469 -- Requirements when this function is used with synchronization control axesWhen this function is used with synchronization control axes, thedistance coded linear scale used for...

  • Page 488

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 470 -Scale endReference markMasteraxisSlave axisStart pointEnd point(1) (2) (3)<1> <2> <3>Fig. 4.7.1 (b) Example of Measuring Three PointsIn the above example, t...

  • Page 489

    B-63783EN-1/01 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT- 471 -Parameter5228Distance 2 from the zero point of the distance coded linear scale to referenceposition[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer axis[Unit of data]Detection uni...

  • Page 490

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 472 -AlarmNo.MessageDescriptionSV0051ILLEGAL SYNCHRONOUS AXISAn illegal parameter is set for a synchronization control axisusing a linear axis with a reference mark.OT0448ILLEGAL PARAMETER (D.C.S...

  • Page 491

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 473 -5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

  • Page 492

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 474 -5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLDGeneral- Start of automatic operation (cycle start)When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in whichmemory (MEM) mode, DNC operatio...

  • Page 493

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 475 -- Halt of automatic operation (feed hold)When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation,the CNC enters the feed hold state and stops op...

  • Page 494

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 476 -SignalCycle start signalST<G005#0>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Starts automatic operation.[Operation]When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC...

  • Page 495

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 477 -Automatic operation signal OP<F000#5>Cycle start lamp signal STL<F000#4>Feed hold lamp signal SPL<F000#3>[Classification]Output signal[Func...

  • Page 496

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 478 -5.2 RESET AND REWINDGeneral- RESETThe CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:1.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 by setting bit 0(ENR) ...

  • Page 497

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 479 -- Reset & rewindWhen the reset signal and rewind signal RRW are set to 1, a resetoccurs, and rewind processing (search for the start of the currentlysele...

  • Page 498

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 480 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02000RWMRSD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0RSDRSDRSDRSDThe resetting (RST) signal is output:0: Whenever the system...

  • Page 499

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 481 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05605IOR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 4IORSpecifies whether to cancel the spindle positioning mode upon reset.0: Do no...

  • Page 500

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 482 -5.3 TESTING A PROGRAMBefore machining is started, the automatic running check can beexecuted. It checks whether the created program can operate themachine as desired. This c...

  • Page 501

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 483 -2.In simultaneous automatic and manual operationa)Command pulses are not output for automatic operation.b)Command pulses are output for manual operation.This...

  • Page 502

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 484 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01005MLE[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6MLEMLEMLEMLESpecifies whether machine lock is valid for each axis.0: I...

  • Page 503

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 485 -5.3.2 Dry RunGeneralA cutting command in the program is executed using the feedratespecified in a parameter. This function is used, for example, to checkonly...

  • Page 504

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 486 -Dry run check signalMDRN<F004#1>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Reports the state of the dry run signal.[Output condition]This signal is set to 1 in the following...

  • Page 505

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 487 -1420Rapid traverse rate along each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit o...

  • Page 506

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 488 -5.3.3 Single BlockGeneralWhen single block signal SBK is set to 1 during automatic operation,automatic operation is stopped after execution of the block currentlybeing execute...

  • Page 507

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 489 -SignalSingle block signalSBK<G004#3>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Enables single block operation.[Operation]When this signal is set to 1, singl...

  • Page 508

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 490 - #5SBMSpecifies whether to stop after each block of custom macro statements inany program.0: Do not stop after each block. However, when stopping is specified inSB7 or SB8...

  • Page 509

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 491 -5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFFGeneralWhen performing manual operation (such as jog feed and manualhandle feed), the user can choose whether to reflect a moved di...

  • Page 510

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 492 -SignalManual absolute SignalABS<G004#5>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Turns off the manual absolute function.[Operation]When this signal is set to 1, the control ...

  • Page 511

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 493 -5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCKSKIPGeneralWhen a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified atthe head of a block, and...

  • Page 512

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 494 -2.When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a blockcontaining /n, the block is not ignored.3.When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC isreading a block co...

  • Page 513

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 495 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G004BDT1G007BDT9BDT8BDT7BDT6BDT5BDT4BDT3BDT2F004MBDT1F005MBDT9MBDT8MBDT7MBDT6MBDT5MBDT4MBDT3MBDT2NoteNOTE1 This function is ign...

  • Page 514

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 496 -5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOPGeneralDuring program execution, this function causes a single block stopright aftera block with a specified sequence number is executed...

  • Page 515

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 497 -5.7 PROGRAM RESTARTGeneralA program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequencenumber of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because o...

  • Page 516

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 498 -Output of M, S, T, and B (second auxiliary function) codes for program restartAfter a block to be restarted is found, M, S, T, and B (second auxiliaryfunction) codes can be ou...

  • Page 517

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 499 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G002SRNF002MSRNParameter7110Order in which the tool moves at the dry run feedratesequentially along axes at program restart[Inp...

  • Page 518

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 500 - # 6MOASpecifies the codes to be output before the tool is moved to themachining restart position upon program restart.0:Last M, S, T, and B codes.1:All M codes and the las...

  • Page 519

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 501 -Caution CAUTION1 Cautions for program restart for a program using amacro variable- Common variableAt program restart, the previous value is used aseach commo...

  • Page 520

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 502 -5.8 BLOCK RESTARTGeneralThe block restart function enables automatic operation to be restartedfrom the start or an intermediate point of a block if automatic operationhas been...

  • Page 521

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 503 -Block restart screenOn the restart display screen, the following values are indicated.Fig.5.8 (a)(i) (DESTINATION) :Absolute coordinates of the tool center a...

  • Page 522

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 504 -Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned onIf the cycle start button is pressed while the block return switch is on,the tool length compensation valu...

  • Page 523

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 505 -SignalBlock restart signal BRN <G002#6>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Selects block restart (block return switch).[Operation]See the description...

  • Page 524

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 506 -Limitation- Automatic reference position returnThe command for automatic reference point return (G28 and G30) inthe cutter compensation mode does not return the tool to the co...

  • Page 525

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 507 -Caution CAUTION 1 The tool may cut the workpiece when it is beingmoved toward the end point of the interrupted block.In this case, an alarm is displayed and ...

  • Page 526

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 508 - CAUTION3 When returning the tool to the start point of the block bya manual operation using the block restart function, thetool is returned to the tip of the vector vertical ...

  • Page 527

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 509 -Reference itemSeries15i/150i-MBOperator’s Manual(Operation)(B-63784EN-1)II-4.9Block restart CAUTION4 When the tool movement is interrupted during acanned d...

  • Page 528

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 510 -5.9 RETRACEGeneralA tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. Thisoperation is referred to as retrace. In addition, a tool can move forwardagain along t...

  • Page 529

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 511 -SignalRetrace signal RVS <G029#4>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the to...

  • Page 530

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 512 -Retrace-in-progress signal RVSL<F044#2>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Notifies the PMC that retrace is in progress.[Operation]This signal turns to "1"w...

  • Page 531

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 513 -Parameter1494Feedrate during reverse movement[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Mini...

  • Page 532

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 514 -Warning WARNINGPositioning (G00)When the tool is positioned based on nonlinearinterpolation by setting bit 4 (LRP) of parameter No.1400 to 0, the path followed by the tool for...

  • Page 533

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 515 -5.10 WITHDRAWING AND RETURNING A TOOLGeneralTo replace a tool damaged in machining or to check the machiningstatus, the tool can be withdrawn from a ...

  • Page 534

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 516 -operation from the tool withdrawal signal TRESC being set to 1 tothe same signal being set to 0 is referred to as tool withdrawalmode.Tool withdrawal mode includes all the ret...

  • Page 535

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 517 -(3) When the mode is returned to automatic operation mode, and toolreturn signal TRRTN is set to 1 and then back to 0, the CNCreturns the tool to the...

  • Page 536

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 518 -Automatic operation mode(MEM, D, T)Tool withdrawal mode in-progress(TRACT)Automatic operation start signal(ST)Tool withdrawal axis movein-progress signal(TRMTN)Movement for re...

  • Page 537

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 519 -Tool withdrawal axis move in-progress signalTRMTN<F044#4>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Used to post notification that an axial movemen...

  • Page 538

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 520 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07630TRCRPS[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0RPSRPSRPSRPSSpecifies whether to perform retraction when the tool retract signal...

  • Page 539

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 521 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsOT0132NOT ON RETURN_POINTThe tool did not arrive at the stored return position along theaxis, or the position m...

  • Page 540

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 522 -5.11 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCELGeneralAutomatic operation can be stopped by inputting block cancel signalBCAN into the control unit during automatic operation. Afterautomatic operat...

  • Page 541

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 523 -Cutter compensationThe path after compensation is re-calculated from two consecutiveblocks after the position where the operation was stopped. The f...

  • Page 542

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 524 -SignalBlock cancel signal BCAN <G157#6>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Cancels the current block in progress.[Operation]When the signal goes to 1 during automatic...

  • Page 543

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 525 -Automatic operation in progress signalOPAutomatic operation starting signalSTLBlock cancel signalBCANBlock cancel acknowledgement signalMBCANMiscella...

  • Page 544

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 526 -5.12 EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPINGMODE/CUTTING MODEGeneralNC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cuttingfeed blocks as described below.- Exact stop (...

  • Page 545

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 527 -5.13 DNC OPERATIONGeneralIn DNC operation, automatic operation is performed by reading aprogram from an external I/O device through the interface.Whe...

  • Page 546

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 528 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G003T#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F003MTAlarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0017ILLEGAL MODE FORGOTO/WHILE/DOA GOTO statement or WHILE-DO statement was fo...

  • Page 547

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 529 -5.14 REGAINING A MANUAL INTERVENTION AMOUNT DURINGAUTOMATIC OPERATIONGeneralA manual intervention amount can be regained even during automaticoperati...

  • Page 548

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 530 -Basic procedure for regaining a manual intervention amount during automaticoperationDuring automatic operation, a manual intervention amount can beregained each time an M code...

  • Page 549

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 531 -(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)(9)(10)M commandMMove commandCode signalsM0-M31Strobe signalMFDistribution completion signal DEN, IPENPMC operationABS switch...

  • Page 550

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 532 -NOTE1 Before the completion signal of an M code for non-buffering is returned, an absolute switch signalselection must be made, and MIGET must be set to1.2 In the reset state ...

  • Page 551

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 533 -2411M code 1 which does not put the following block in the buffer register2412M code 2 which does not put the following block in the buffer register2...

  • Page 552

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 534 -2450Range of M codes without buffering (1) (lower limit)2451Range of M codes without buffering (1) (upper limit)2452Range of M codes without buffering (2) (lower limit)2453Ran...

  • Page 553

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 535 -5.15 SIMULTANEOUS AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL OPERATIONGeneralSimultaneous automatic and manual operation enables manualoperation to be performed during aut...

  • Page 554

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 536 -An example of switching to simultaneous automatic and manualoperation starting with a block during automatic operation is givenbelow1.Assume that program command Mxx; is used ...

  • Page 555

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 537 -when the simultaneous automatic and manual operation mode isselected.So, first specify the parking signal of each axis to select a desiredinterrupt t...

  • Page 556

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 538 -Memory operation selection signal MEMZ-axis manual handle interrupt switchZ-axis parking signal PK3Simultaneous automatic and manual operation selection signal MOVLManual hand...

  • Page 557

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 539 -- Manual operation in simultaneous automatic and manual operationAutomatic operation during simultaneous automatic and manualoperation is the same as...

  • Page 558

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 540 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01000EMIEHM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5EHMEHMEHMEHMSpecifies conditions when handle interruption is valid.0: W...

  • Page 559

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 541 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01604MNJ[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0MNJMNJMNJMNJSpecifies whether both cutting feed accel...

  • Page 560

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 542 -5.16 DNC OPERATION FROM OPEN CNC SELECTING SIGNALOverviewIn DNC operation mode (DNC) or memory operation mode (MEM),setting the DNC operation select signal from the open CNC t...

  • Page 561

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 543 -Parameter0020Foreground input device interface number[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 16Set a foreground input device...

  • Page 562

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 544 -5.17 DNC OPERATION FROM MEMORY CARD INTERFACEA file on a memory card can be specified for DNC operation.A file on a memory card can also be called and executed as asubprogram ...

  • Page 563

    B-63783EN-1/01 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION- 545 -Parameters0020Foreground input device interface number[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 16Set a foreground input devic...

  • Page 564

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63783EN-1/01- 546 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07616EXT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]BitNOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then back on. # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3EXTEXTEXTEXTSpeci...

  • Page 565

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 547 -6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

  • Page 566

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 548 -6.1 POSITIONINGGeneralThe G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece systemspecified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverserate.In the ...

  • Page 567

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 549 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01400LRP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4LRPLRPLRPLRPSelects the method used for positioning (G00)....

  • Page 568

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 550 -6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATIONGeneralTools can move along a lineA tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedratespecified in F. The feedrate specified in F is e...

  • Page 569

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 551 -Parameter1493Cutting feedrateNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turnedoff then back on for the setting to become effective.[Input typ...

  • Page 570

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 552 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0187FEED ZERO ( COMMAND )The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been setto 0.This alarm is also generated if the F code inst...

  • Page 571

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 553 -6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONGeneralThe command below will move a tool along a circular arc."Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on th...

  • Page 572

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 554 -If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the endpoint exceeds the permitted value in a parameter (No.2410), an P/S alarm(No.191) occurs.The distanc...

  • Page 573

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 555 -Fig.6.3 (d) Case Where a Spiral Is ProducedThe arc radius changes linearly with the center angle (t). Spiralinterpolation is performed using a circular comman...

  • Page 574

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 556 -Parameter1022Designation of each axis in relation to the basic coordinate system[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - 7Planes selected for ci...

  • Page 575

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 557 -2410Arc radius error limit value[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system...

  • Page 576

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 558 -NoteNOTE1 If I, J, K, and R are specified simultaneously, thespecification by R is used and the others are ignored.2 If an axis not comprising the specified plane isspecified...

  • Page 577

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 559 -6.4 THREADING6.4.1 ThreadingOverviewA thread can be cut by moving a tool in synchronization with the rotatingspindle.The spindle speed is sequentially read fro...

  • Page 578

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 560 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F001THRDParameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01400TDR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1TDRTDRTDRTDRSpecifies whether dry r...

  • Page 579

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 561 -Warning WARNINGIf the feed is stopped during threading, withoutstopping the spindle, the depth of cut increasesdangerously. Therefore, the feed hold function ...

  • Page 580

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 562 -6.4.2 Threading Based on an Arbitrary Spindle Gear RatioOverviewThis function sets M:N as the gear ratio between the spindle and positioncoder for threading. M and N can be ...

  • Page 581

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 563 -M : Number of gear teeth on the position coder [teeth]N : Number of gear teeth on the spindle [teeth]L : Thread pitch [machine/rev]P : Number of pulses receive...

  • Page 582

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 564 - Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Timing Chart for Gear Ratio Modification from the PMC(1) For automatic operationM code for spindle gearratio modificationMFFINSpindle gear ratiomodification...

  • Page 583

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 565 -Parameter5611Number of samples of sampling data for obtaining the mean spindle speed[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]0 - 4...

  • Page 584

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 566 -Caution CAUTION1 Never modify the values of the parameters used toset a gear ratio, during machining such as threading.2 When 0 is set in parameter No. 5847 and No. 5848,the ...

  • Page 585

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 567 -6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONINGGeneralFor accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), finalpositioning from one direction is available.Fig.6....

  • Page 586

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 568 -6820Overrun distance and direction of unidirectional positioning (G60)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch, degree (machine unit)[Minimum unit...

  • Page 587

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 569 -6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATIONGeneralHelical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying upto two other axes which move synchronously with the circ...

  • Page 588

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 570 -Fig.6.6 (b) Feedrate When Parameter HTG = 1Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01401HTG[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2HTGHTGHTGHTGSpecifies how to ...

  • Page 589

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 571 -6.7 HELICAL INTERPOLATION BGeneralWith the speed command for helical interpolation B, parameter HTG (bit2 of parameter No. 1401) can be used to specify either ...

  • Page 590

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 572 -Fig.6.7 (b) Feedrate When Parameter HTG = 1Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01401HTG[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2HTGHTGHTGHTGSpecifies how to ...

  • Page 591

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 573 -6.8 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATIONGeneralAn involute curve can be machined using involute interpolation. Cuttercompensation C can also be used. The use of involute i...

  • Page 592

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 574 -1483Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the accelerationof fine HPCC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/m...

  • Page 593

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 575 -1491Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the accelerationduring circular interpolation (for normal mode)[Input type]Parameter input[Data...

  • Page 594

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 576 -1663Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on theacceleration of fine HPCC for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/sec/...

  • Page 595

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 577 -1665Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on theacceleration during circular interpolation for each axis (for normal mode)[Input type]Param...

  • Page 596

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 578 -6630Lower override limit of automatic velocity control during involuteinterpolation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]%[Valid data range]0 - 100When t...

  • Page 597

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 579 -6.9 SPLINE INTERPOLATIONGeneralHelical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying upto two other axes which move synchronously with the circu...

  • Page 598

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 580 -6.10 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATIONGeneralA command programmed in the Cartesian coordinate system is convertedinto movement along a linear axis (movement of a tool) and movem...

  • Page 599

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 581 -Parameter1032Designation of axis (linear axis) used for polar coordinate interpolation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - Max ax...

  • Page 600

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 582 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0213ILLEGAL USE OF G12.1/G13.1The axis No. of plane selection parameter No. 1032 (linearaxis) and No. 1033 (axis of rotation) in the p...

  • Page 601

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 583 -6.10.1 Virtual Axis Direction Compensation for Polar CoordinateInterpolationOverviewIn polar coordinate interpolation, this function compensates a machine ifit...

  • Page 602

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 584 -Parameters6058Compensation for error on hypothetical axis of polar coordinateinterpolation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimu...

  • Page 603

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 585 -6.11 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATIONGeneralAn amount of travel around a rotation axis specified as an angle isinternally converted into an amount of travel al...

  • Page 604

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 586 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006DIAROT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ROTROTROTROTSpecifies whether the axis requires inch/metric conversio...

  • Page 605

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 587 -1260Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incre...

  • Page 606

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 588 -6.12 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION CUTTING POINTCONTROLOverviewThe conventional cylindrical interpolation controls the tool center insuch a manner that the axis of the tool moving a...

  • Page 607

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 589 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006DIAROT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ROTROTROTROTSpecifies whether the axis requ...

  • Page 608

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 590 -1260Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the applie...

  • Page 609

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 591 -6112Limit for changing cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in asingle block[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, ...

  • Page 610

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 592 -6113Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical interpolation cuttingpoint compensation in the previous block unchanged.[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit o...

  • Page 611

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 593 -6.13 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROLGeneralWhile a tool for which orientation is determined about the rotation axis(C-axis) is moving in the XY plane, the norm...

  • Page 612

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 594 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006NDC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6NDCNDCNDCNDCSpecifies the normal direction control function.0: Not norma...

  • Page 613

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 595 -7794Limit of the travel distance moved using the normal-direction angle in theprevious block[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, ...

  • Page 614

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 596 -6.14 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATIONGeneralExponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of aworkpiece in the movement about the rotation axis. The function alsoperfor...

  • Page 615

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 597 -7685Interval in exponential interpolation for a linear axis (span value)[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (machine unit)[Mi...

  • Page 616

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 598 -6.15 SMOOTH INTERPOLATIONGeneralEither of two types of machining can be selected, depending on theprogram command.1)For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critic...

  • Page 617

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 599 -7675Minimum travel of a block executed with smooth interpolation[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit...

  • Page 618

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 600 -7677Minimum tolerance of a block executed with smooth interpolation[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depends on th...

  • Page 619

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 601 -6.16 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATIONGeneralSinusoidal interpolation can be performed by using a circularinterpolation axis of helical interpolation as a...

  • Page 620

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 602 -6.17 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATIONGeneralSpiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolationcommand together with a desired number of revoluti...

  • Page 621

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 603 -- Conical interpolation+Z+X+YFig. 6.17 (b) Conical interpolationParameter2440Minimum radius to which a specified feedrate is kept in spiral interpolatio...

  • Page 622

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 604 -2511Permissible difference between the positions of the specified end point andthe end point calculated from the increment or decrement and number ofcircles in spiral or conical...

  • Page 623

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 605 -6.18 NURBS INTERPOLATIONGeneralMany computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal diesfor automobiles utilize non-uniform rational B-spline (...

  • Page 624

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 606 -Parameter1478Allowable speed difference for automatic corner deceleration[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[...

  • Page 625

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 607 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS1001ILLEGAL ORDER (NURBS)The specified number of levels is incorrect.PS1002NO KNOT COMMAND (NURBS)Knot has not b...

  • Page 626

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 608 -6.18.1 NURBS Interpolation Additional FunctionsThe following functions are added to the NURBS interpolation for theFANUC Series 15i.- Parametric velocity controlThe maximum spee...

  • Page 627

    B-63783EN-1/01 6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION- 609 -- Supporting roll-overIf a control point command is issued to a rotation axis to be subjected toroll-over in absolute (G90) mode, a change made due to s...

  • Page 628

    6.NTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 610 -6.19 3-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02.4 ANDG03.4)Specifying an intermediate and end point on an arc enables circularinterpolation in a 3-dimensional space.An arc in a 3...

  • Page 629

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 611 -7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATIONAND DECELERATION CONTROL

  • Page 630

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 612 -7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROLThe feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following twofeedfunctions are available:1.Rapid traverseWhen the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves...

  • Page 631

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 613 -7.1.1 Rapid Traverse RateOverviewThe positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.G00 IP_ ;G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)IP_ ; Dimension word for t...

  • Page 632

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 614 -- Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F001RPDParameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01000CIP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0CIPCIPCIPCIPSpecifies what to confirm with an in-position ...

  • Page 633

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 615 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01401RFO[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3RFORFORFORFOSpecifies whether to stop during rapid traverse when the cutting feedrateoverride is set...

  • Page 634

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 616 -7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate ClampOverviewA common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along eachaxis with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with anoverride applied) exceeds a...

  • Page 635

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 617 -7.1.3 Feed per MinuteGeneralAfter specifying G94 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feedof the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting a numberafter F. G94 is a modal...

  • Page 636

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 618 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02400F41[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1F41F41F41F41If the feed per minute of F code (G94 mode) is entered in metric withoutthe decimal p...

  • Page 637

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 619 -7.1.4 Feed per Revolution/Feed per Revolution without PositionCoderOverview- Feed per revolutionSpecify G95 (feed-per-revolution mode), then directly specify anumeric value, preceded by F, to ...

  • Page 638

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 620 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02405RSOFPR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6FPRFPRFPRFPRSpecifies whether the function for feed per rotation without a positioncoder (the ...

  • Page 639

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 621 -7.1.5 F1-digit FeedGeneralWhen a one-digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrateset for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. WhenF0 is specified, the rapid ...

  • Page 640

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 622 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01406F1O[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0F1OF1OF1OF1OSpecifies whether to enable feedrate override, second feedrate override,and override ...

  • Page 641

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 623 -1451F1 feedrate1452F2 feedrate1453F3 feedrate1454F4 feedrate1455F5 feedrate1456F6 feedrate1457F7 feedrate1458F8 feedrate1459F9 feedrate[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/...

  • Page 642

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 624 -1460Upper feedrate limit for F1 to F4[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the re...

  • Page 643

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 625 -7.1.6 Feedrate Inverse Time SpecificationOverviewFeedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the blockand inverse time (FRN).- Linear interpolation (G01)FRN=1/Time(min)=Speed...

  • Page 644

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 626 -7.1.7 Override7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse overrideOverviewThe rapid traverse rate can be overridden as follows:F0, F1%, 50%, 100%F0:Feedrate to be set for each axis (parameter No. 1421)F1:Percentage (par...

  • Page 645

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 627 -SignalRapid traverse override signal ROV1, ROV2 <G006#5, #6>[Classification]Input signal[Function]These signals override the rapid traverse rate[Operation]These code signals correspond t...

  • Page 646

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 628 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01402ROV[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ROVROVROVROVSpecifies override of the rapid traverse feedrate.0: The override is F0, F1, 50%, or ...

  • Page 647

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 629 -7.1.7.2 Feedrate overrideGeneralA programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage(%) selected by the override dial. This feature is used to check aprogram.For example, when a f...

  • Page 648

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 630 -- Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G012*FV7*FV6*FV5*FV4*FV3*FV2*FV1*FV0Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01401RFO[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit #3 #3 #3 #3RFORFORFORFOSpecifies whether to ...

  • Page 649

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 631 -7.1.7.3 Second feedrate overrideOverviewThese signals override the cutting feedrate after the cutting feedrate hasbeen overridden by first override *FV0 to *FV7.There are two types of second f...

  • Page 650

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 632 -- Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G013*AFV7*AFV6*AFV5*AFV4*AFV3*AFV2*AFV1*AFV0#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G146*AFV7B *AFV6B *AFV5B *AFV4B *AFV3B *AFV2B *AFV1B *AFV0BG147*AFV15B *AFV14B *AFV13B *AFV12B *AFV11B *AF...

  • Page 651

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 633 -7.1.7.4 Override cancelOverviewThe override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.SignalOverride cancel signal OVC <G004#4>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Feedrate over...

  • Page 652

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 634 -7.1.8 Automatic Corner OverrideOverview- Inner corner automatic overrideWhen G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensationapplied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically ...

  • Page 653

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 635 -- Internal circular cutting feedrate changeFor internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmedpath is set to a specified feedrate (F) by specifying the circular cuttingfeedrat...

  • Page 654

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 636 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01402CAFC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5CAFCCAFCCAFCCAFCSpecifies whether to perform circular cutting point feedrate change incutter com...

  • Page 655

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 637 -6611Effective angle for internal corner automatic override (θθθθp)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the ...

  • Page 656

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 638 -6614Distance for ending automatic override (Ls)[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the reference axis[V...

  • Page 657

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 639 -7.1.9 External DecelerationGeneralThese signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to thespeed which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427.SignalExternal deceleration signa...

  • Page 658

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 640 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01005EDMEDP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4EDPEDPEDPEDPFor each axis, specifies whether the external deceleration signal for theposit...

  • Page 659

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 641 -7.1.10 Feed Stop FunctionOverviewDuring axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviationamount at all times. When the amount exceeds the "feed stop positiondeviation amount&...

  • Page 660

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 642 -7.1.11 Deceleration Based on Acceleration during CircularInterpolationGeneralWhen cutting is performed at high speed for circular, helical, or spiralinterpolation, the actual tool path will vary sli...

  • Page 661

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 643 -NOTEIn fine HPCC mode, an optimum feedrate thatcauses the accelerations on individual axes to fallwithin the range of permissible acceleration iscalculated even if the permissible accelerations...

  • Page 662

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 644 -Parameter1483Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the accelerationof fine HPCC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine uni...

  • Page 663

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 645 -1663Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on theacceleration of fine HPCC for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, ...

  • Page 664

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 646 -1665Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on the accelerationduring circular interpolation for each axis (for normal mode)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of d...

  • Page 665

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 647 -7.1.12 Advanced Preview ControlGeneralThis function is provided to enable high-speed high-precisionmachining with the FANUC Series 16i. With the FANUC Series 15i,on the other hand, the look-ah...

  • Page 666

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 648 -7.1.13 Nano InterpolationGeneralThe output from the NC to the servo is usually in units of detectionunits. This function allows output to the servo in units of thousandthsof detection units, thereb...

  • Page 667

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 649 -7.1.14 Fine HPCCGeneralThis function is designed to achieve high-speed, high-precisionmachining with a program involving a sequence of very small straightlines and NURBS curved lines, like thos...

  • Page 668

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 650 -(3) Advanced feed-forward function(4) Nano interpolationWith the fine HPCC function, the additional functions listed below canbe used to achieve high-speed, high-precision machining for very smallst...

  • Page 669

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 651 -Feedrate control conditionsIn automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate is controlled asdescribed below:(a) From the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, the feedratein the corner ...

  • Page 670

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 652 -Example of determining the feedrate from the feedrate difference on each axisThe feedrate at a corner is calculated from the feedrate difference oneach axis, as described below.he tangent feedrate t...

  • Page 671

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 653 -Example of determining the feedrate with the acceleration on each axisWhen consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in theexample shown in the figure below, the feedrate differences...

  • Page 672

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 654 -The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differsdepending on the setting of parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 1517). If "0" is set, the highest feedrate that does not cause t...

  • Page 673

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 655 -Example of determining the feedrate with the cutting loadThis function is enabled when parameter ZAG (bit 4 of No. 7565) is setto 1.Fig. 7.1.14 (d) During ascent on the Z-axisFig. 7.1.14 (e) ...

  • Page 674

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 656 -XY planeZ30°45°60°90°Area1Area2Area3Area4 CAUTION1 The function for determining the feedrate with thecutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallelwith the Z-axis. Thus, it may not be...

  • Page 675

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 657 -Ignoring F code commandsIn a block in which automatic feedrate control is enabled, all feedcommands (F commands) can be ignored by setting parameter NOF (bit7 of No. 7565). The term feed comma...

  • Page 676

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 658 -ParameterSee also the explanation of those parameters for look-aheadacceleration/deceleration before interpolation because this functionuses it.1483Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function...

  • Page 677

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 659 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01517FNW[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6FNWFNWFNWFNWSpecifies whether the method of determining the feedrate based on thefeedrate difference ...

  • Page 678

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 660 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07565NOFZAG[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4ZAGZAGZAGZAGSpecifies whether to perform the deceleration function (deceleration byZ-axis falling angle) ...

  • Page 679

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 661 -7591Override for area 2 in deceleration based on fine HPCC cutting load7592Override for area 3 in deceleration based on fine HPCC cutting load7593Override for area 4 in deceleration based on fi...

  • Page 680

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 662 -7.1.14.1 Smooth Velocity ControlOverviewSmooth velocity control is a function that performs smooth velocitydetermination by recognizing the overall figure from the multiplepreceding and succeeding b...

  • Page 681

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 663 -Regular deceleration with acceleration determines an optimum velocityfor the specified figure. If, therefore, a curve is approximated withconsecutive minute stright lines, for example, deceler...

  • Page 682

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 664 -7.1.15 Machining type in HPCC screen programmingGeneralThe high-speed high-precision machining setting screen supports threemachining parameter sets (FINE, MEDIUM, and ROUGH). Theparameter set to us...

  • Page 683

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 665 - - Parameter numbersThe defaults of the following parameters can be retained and restored:1473,1476,1635,1656,1660,1663,1985NOTEIf ATDF is set to 1 so that execution parameters arerestored to t...

  • Page 684

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 666 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#08403TSP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0TSPSpecifies whether to transfer the same advance feedforwardcoefficient to the corresponding working parameter on the spindles...

  • Page 685

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 667 -7.1.16 Feedrate Specification on a Virtual Circle for a Rotary AxisThis function improves a method of specifying a speed for a machinehaving a rotation axis.[Conventional method]Program example...

  • Page 686

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 668 -[Method of specifying a speed on a virtual circle for a rotation axis]This method controls the feedrate in such a way that it takes thetime T', calculated using the following expression, to movethro...

  • Page 687

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 669 -Restrictions- Unusable functionsThis function cannot be used with the following functions:- The following G functions in group 01PositioningCircular interpolation, helical interpolation, spiral...

  • Page 688

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 670 -2524Virtual-circle radius in specifying the speed on a virtual circle for a rotationaxis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real-number axis[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data...

  • Page 689

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 671 -7.1.17 Automatic Feedrate Control by AreaOverviewWhen an area on the XY plane(*1) is specified in cutting mode inautomatic operation, the area override can be applied to a specifiedfeedrate(*2)...

  • Page 690

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 672 -Defining areas-Up to four areas can be set. We'll use area numbers to call theseareas area 1 to area 4.-Each area is set as a quadrangle whose sides are parallel to the X-and Y-axes.Each area inclu...

  • Page 691

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 673 -Determining whether the tool is in an areaWhether the tool has entered an area is checked based on the machinecoordinates.Setting an areaThere are three methods for setting an area, that is, fo...

  • Page 692

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 674 -Parameters1280Coordinates of diagonal vertex 1 of area 1 in automatic feedrate control byarea1281Coordinates of diagonal vertex 2 of area 1 in automatic feedrate control byarea1282Coordinates of dia...

  • Page 693

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 675 -2063Area override for area 4 in automatic feedrate control by area[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]%[Valid data range]0 to 127The area overrides for areas 1 to 4 in au...

  • Page 694

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 676 -7.1.18 Jerk ControlOverviewLook-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and fineHPCC, which are high-speed, high-precision machine functions,perform speed control in such a way that the...

  • Page 695

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 677 -7.1.18.1 Speed control based on changes to acceleration for each axisVibration or shocks may occur to the machine in portions where thereis a large change to acceleration, for example, a portio...

  • Page 696

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 678 -Example of parameter settingThe following figure consists of a straight line and an arc. Assume thatthe specified speed is 6000 mm/min and the radius of the arc is 10 mm.Then the acceleration chang...

  • Page 697

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 679 -Continuous linear interpolationIn speed control based on acceleration changes in continuous linearinterpolation, the deceleration speed is obtained from changes toacceleration between the start...

  • Page 698

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 680 -Parameter1673Permissible acceleration change level for each axis in speed control basedon acceleration changes for jerk control[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/sec/sec,...

  • Page 699

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 681 -Reference itemII-18.5Fine HPCCSeries15i/150i-MBOperator’s Manual(Programming)(B-63784EN)II-18.4Look-aheadacceleration/decelerationbefore interpolationSeries15i/150i-BConnection Manual(this ma...

  • Page 700

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 682 -7.1.18.2 Look-ahead smooth bell-shaped acceleration/decelerationbefore interpolationLook-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolationachieves smooth acceleration/deceleration by ...

  • Page 701

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 683 -Setting jerk change timeThe jerk change time is set in parameter No. 1675 as a ratio to theacceleration change time.Therefore, the actual jerk change time is determined as the ratio to theaccel...

  • Page 702

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 684 -Parameter1675Ratio of the jerk change time in smooth bell-shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]%[Valid data range]0 to 50Spe...

  • Page 703

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 685 -7.2 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL7.2.1 Post-interpolation Automatic Acceleration/DecelerationGeneralAcceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and endingmovement, result...

  • Page 704

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 686 -- Jog feedJGE(No.1600#5)Acceleration/deceleration type0Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time) if the bell-sh...

  • Page 705

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 687 -- Linear acceleration/decelerationWith linear acceleration/deceleration, the time required foracceleration/deceleration is the shortest, provided that the accelerationis the same. Note, howe...

  • Page 706

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 688 -T::Time constantFeedrateTimeBell-shapedacceleration/decelerationTTFeedrateTimeBell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration)T2TTSet time constants T1 and T2 for parameters.(The accele...

  • Page 707

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 689 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01600NEXJGECTEREX[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0REXREXREXREXSpecifies acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse as follows...

  • Page 708

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 690 -1620Time constant (T) for linear acceleration/deceleration or time constant (T1)for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse along each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Inte...

  • Page 709

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 691 -1621FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapidtraverse along each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (...

  • Page 710

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 692 -1622Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]msec[Valid data range]0 - 4000For each axis, set the time constan...

  • Page 711

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 693 -1624Jog acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]msec[Valid data range]0 - 4000For each axis, set the time constant ...

  • Page 712

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 694 -1636Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traversealong each axis (T2)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]msec[Valid data range]0 - 1000Set tim...

  • Page 713

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 695 -7.2.2 Look-ahead Acceleration/Deceleration Before interpolationGeneralWhen acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used,acceleration/deceleration is applied to the interpolated data....

  • Page 714

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 696 -Acceleration/deceleration typesThere are two types of acceleration/deceleration, the linearacceleration/deceleration type and the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration type. By setting a non-zero v...

  • Page 715

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 697 -- Example of accelerationAcceleration is performed so that the feedrate specified for a block isattained when the block is executed.- Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before i...

  • Page 716

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 698 -- Method of determining the tangent accelerationAcceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangentacceleration/deceleration that does not exceed the acceleration set foreach axis.(Examp...

  • Page 717

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 699 -- AccelerationAcceleration is performed so that the feedrate programmed for a blockis attained at the beginning of the block.- DecelerationDeceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate ...

  • Page 718

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 700 -- Deceleration based on a distanceIf the total distance of the blocks read ahead becomes shorter than orequal to the deceleration distance obtained from the current feedrate,deceleration starts.If t...

  • Page 719

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 701 -(b) If A + B > Remaining amount of travel in the block beingexecuted when the single-block command is executedA stop state may continue over several blocks.The stop is made as described la...

  • Page 720

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 702 -(b) If A > Remaining amount of travel in the block beingexecuted when the single-block command is executedA stop state may continue over several blocks.The stop is made as described later.Feedrat...

  • Page 721

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 703 -Deceleration based on the feedrate difference at a cornerWith look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, thetangent feedrate is changed smoothly. Thus, no path error occurs d...

  • Page 722

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 704 -The method of deceleration based on the feedrate difference differsdepending on the setting made for parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 1517). If "0" is set, the largest feedrate that does not ex...

  • Page 723

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 705 -Override to a determined feedrateThe following gives the specifications of override to a feedratedetermined by functions such as deceleration based on feedratedifference in look-ahead acceler...

  • Page 724

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 706 -Restrictions- Conditions under which look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolationare performedEven when look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolationmode are specified, look...

  • Page 725

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 707 -SignalLook-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode signal ADMOD <F159#2> [Classification]Output signal [Function]Notifies the user that the system is in look-ahead acc...

  • Page 726

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 708 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01403OVR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6OVRIn look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and fineHPCC:0: Override is disabled for deceleration...

  • Page 727

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 709 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01517FCCFNW[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6FNWFNWFNWFNWSpecifies whether the method of determining the feedrate based on thefeedrate differ...

  • Page 728

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 710 -1656Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]msec[Valid data range]0 - 200This parameter sets t...

  • Page 729

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 711 -1660Maximum allowable acceleration of acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/s...

  • Page 730

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 712 -NoteNOTE1 If the permissible acceleration set for one axis is twoor more times greater than that set for another, thefeedrate may decrease temporarily at those cornerswhere the travel direction chan...

  • Page 731

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 713 -7.2.2.1 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant changeIn Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as sho...

  • Page 732

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 714 -If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specifiedacceleration occurs as shown above, this function shortens theacceleration/deceleration time by changing the internal acceleration forac...

  • Page 733

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 715 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01603BCG[Input section]Parameter input[Data type]Bit type # 6BCGThe bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant changefunction is:0:Disabled.1:Enabled.1473...

  • Page 734

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 716 -1559Acceleration/deceleration speed (for semifinishing) for the bell-shapedacceleration/deceleration time constant change function[Input section]Setting input[Data type]Real type[Unit of data]mm/min...

  • Page 735

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 717 -7.2.3 Corner Control7.2.3.1 In-position checkGeneralWhether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range ischecked.If the in-position check function is enabled, the CNC checks ...

  • Page 736

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 718 -In-position signalsINP1<F64#6>, INP2<F68#6>, ... [Classification]Output signal [Function]These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-positioncondition.They are provide...

  • Page 737

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 719 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01000CSZCIP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0CIPCIPCIPCIPSpecifies what to confirm with an in-position check.0: Merely confirm that ...

  • Page 738

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 720 -7.2.4 Feed Forward in Rapid TraverseGeneralFeed-forward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. Inthis case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the timerequired for pos...

  • Page 739

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 721 -7.2.5 Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation of Linear TypeRapid TraverseConventionally, only acceleration/deceleration after interpolationcould be applied to rapid traverse.This func...

  • Page 740

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 722 -Restrictions- Conditions for acceleration/deceleration before interpolationWhen the conditions listed below are all satisfied, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation becomes valid for rapid ...

  • Page 741

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 723 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01603FRP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5FRPTo linear type rapid traverse:0:Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.The type of accele...

  • Page 742

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 724 -1672Acceleration change period of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation to linear type rapid traverse[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]msec[Valid data ra...

  • Page 743

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 725 -7.2.6 Optimum Torque Acceleration/DecelerationOverviewThis function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with thetorque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of them...

  • Page 744

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 726 -ExplanationOptimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the limitedacceleration curve data set with a parameter on the basis of the axialmovement direction and the acceleration/deceleration stat...

  • Page 745

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 727 -- Setting limited acceleration curve dataPermissibleaccelerationSpeedFbFaAaP0P1P2P3P4P5AbLimited accelerationcurveFig. 7.2.6 (c) Acceleration setting pointsFor each movement direction, for ...

  • Page 746

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 728 -Any acceleration setting point for which the speed parameter (one ofNos. 6710 to 6713) is set to 0 will be skipped, and the preceding andsucceeding points for which the parameter is set to a non-zer...

  • Page 747

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 729 -Table 7.2.6 (e) Example of setting parameters related to limited acceleration curve dataParameter No.SettingUnitRemarksRapid traverse rate142030000.mm/minThe ball screw pitch is assumed 15 m...

  • Page 748

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 730 -- Examples of setting if the limited acceleration curve differs depending on whetheracceleration or deceleration is in progress and whether the movement is in theminus or plus directionIf the limit...

  • Page 749

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 731 -(2) For acceleration and movement in the minus directionIf the limited acceleration curve is as shown in the figure below,set the parameters as follows:(0.01-% units)Parameter No. 6720= 7273 ...

  • Page 750

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 732 -(4) For deceleration and movement in the minus directionIf the limited acceleration curve is as shown in the figure below,set the parameters as follows:(0.01-% units)Parameter No. 6732 = 9091 (ratio...

  • Page 751

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 733 -Limitations- Linear type positioningOptimum torque acceleration/deceleration is not enabled unless lineartype positioning is enabled (LRP, bit 4 of parameter No. 1400, = 1).- Modes and condit...

  • Page 752

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 734 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06700FAP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0FAPFAPFAPFAPOptimum torque acceleration/deceleration is:0: Disabled.1: Enabled.By setting both l...

  • Page 753

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 735 -6710Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P1)6711Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P2)6712Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P3)6713Optimum torqu...

  • Page 754

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 736 -6723Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P3 duringmovement in - direction and acceleration)6724Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P04duringmovement in - d...

  • Page 755

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 737 -6737Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 duringmovement in - direction and deceleration)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer axis[Unit of data]0.01%[Valid dat...

  • Page 756

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63783EN-1/01- 738 -1672Acceleration change time of before-interpolation bell-shapedacceleration/deceleration for linear type rapid traverseor acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration inoptimum...

  • Page 757

    B-63783EN-1/01 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL- 739 -Alarm and MessageNo.MessageDescriptionOT0710ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) The permissible acceleration parameter for optim...

  • Page 758

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 740 -8 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

  • Page 759

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 741 -8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONGeneral- Miscellaneous Function (M code)When a numeral of up to 10 digits is specified following address M,code sig...

  • Page 760

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 742 -(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.The maximum allowable number of digits can be specified foreach function by using parameter No. 2030 to 2033. ...

  • Page 761

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 743 -Example2) Move command and miscellaneous function in the same blocka. Execution of a miscellaneous function without waiting for move commandcompletionM command (ind...

  • Page 762

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 744 -SignalMiscellaneous function code signalsM00-M31 <F016-F019>Miscellaneous function strobe signalMF <F008#0>[Classification]Output signal[Function]...

  • Page 763

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 745 -Spindle-speed code signalsS00 to S31<F020 to F023>Spindle-speed strobe signalSF<F008#1>[Classification]Output signal[Function]These signals report that ...

  • Page 764

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 746 -Distribution end signal DEN<F001#0>IPEN<F001#1>[Classification]Output signal[Function]These signals report that all commands (such as move command...

  • Page 765

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 747 -F009DM30DM02DM01DM00F016M07M06M05M04M03M02M01M00F017M15M14M13M12M11M10M09M08F018M23M22M21M20M19M18M17M16F019M31M30M29M28M27M26M25M24F020S07S06S05S04S03S02S01S00F021...

  • Page 766

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 748 - # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2TSNTSNTSNTSNSpecifies whether a minus (-) can be used in a T code.0: Cannot be used1: Can be used # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3BSNBS...

  • Page 767

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 749 -2030Allowable number of digits in an M code[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in an M code....

  • Page 768

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 750 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02403M02[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0M02M02M02M02When M02 is transmitted during memory operation0: M02 ...

  • Page 769

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 751 -2450Range of M codes without buffering (1) (lower limit)2451Range of M codes without buffering (1) (upper limit)2452Range of M codes without buffering (2) (lower...

  • Page 770

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 752 -NoteNOTE1 When a move command and miscellaneousfunction are specified in the same block, thecommands are executed in one of the following twoways:i) Simultane...

  • Page 771

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 753 -8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCKGeneralInhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function.That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued.This function is ...

  • Page 772

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 754 -Reference itemSeries15i/150i-MBOperator’s Manual(Operation)(B-63784EN-1)II-5.1Machine lock andmiscellaneous function

  • Page 773

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 755 -8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SIGLE BLOCKGeneralSo far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However,this function allows up to three M codes to be c...

  • Page 774

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 756 -(5) When the completion signal stays "1" for a time (TFIN) set byparameter No. 2011, all strobe signals (MF, MF2, MF3, MF4, andMF5) are set to "...

  • Page 775

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 757 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F045MF5MF4MF3MF2F144M207M206M205M204M203M202M201M200F145M215M214M213M212M211M210M209M208F146M307M306M305M304M303M302M301M300F147M315M3...

  • Page 776

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 758 -8.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACEGeneralTo accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high-speed M/S/T/Binterface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and...

  • Page 777

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 759 -MxxMyyNext blockCode signalStrobe signal MFPMC side operationMiscellaneous functioncompletion signal MFINFig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high-speed systemMxxMyyNe...

  • Page 778

    8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 760 -Spindle function completion signalSFIN<G046#1>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the hig...

  • Page 779

    B-63783EN-1/01 8.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION- 761 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02004MHI[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0MHIMHIMHIMHIThe strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, ...

  • Page 780

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 762 -9 SPINDLE FUNCTION CAUTIONThe signal notations used in this section areexplained below:The names of DI/DO signals for each spindle arefollowed by one of the following alp...

  • Page 781

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 763 -9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)GeneralWhen up to ten digits are specified after address S, code and strobesignals are sent out and used to co...

  • Page 782

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 764 -2031Allowable number of digits in an S code[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - 10Specify the allowable number of digits in an S code.NOTETo...

  • Page 783

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 765 -9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUTGeneralThere are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serialoutput and spindle analog o...

  • Page 784

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 766 -NOTE1 Using parameter No. 5850, select the spindle to becontrolled. Each function controls a selectedspindle.2 These functions are provided by the spindle controlunit. ...

  • Page 785

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 767 -For each spindle, set the type of motor in bit 0 (A/S) of parameterNo. 5606, and the motor number in parameter No. 5841. Make thesettings in the order ...

  • Page 786

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 768 -- Selecting a spindle to be controlledWhen there are two or more spindles, you must select a spindle that iscurrently controlled by the CNC.The spindle to be controlled i...

  • Page 787

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 769 -SignalSpindle control unit signals for the serial spindle<G200 to G201><G226 to G229><F228 to F231>:for the first serial spindle<G2...

  • Page 788

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 770 - Timing chartM61M62M commandM61/M62Strobe signalMFSpindle switchprocessingAuxiliary function completionsignal FINSpindle control confirmationsignal SPN0,SPN1,SPN21 ...

  • Page 789

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 771 -Signal address- Common to analog and serial spindles#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F154SPN2F155SPN1SPN0- For 1st SERIAL SPINDLE#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G200G201G226RCHARSLAINTG...

  • Page 790

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 772 -- For 3rd SERIAL SPINDLE#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G204G205G210RCHCRSLCINTGCSOCNC MCFNC SPSLC*ESPCARSTCG211MRDYC ORCMCSFRCSRVCCTH1CCTH2CTLMHCTLMLCG212MPOFCSLVCG213INCMDC OVRIDCNRROC...

  • Page 791

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 773 -Parameter- Setting spindle motor and spindle number#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05606A/S[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0A/...

  • Page 792

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 774 -5846Suffix for serial spindle (sub-spindle) display[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]0 - 122Set a suffix for spindle speed display on ...

  • Page 793

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 775 -- Connecting an analog spindle control unit5613Compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speed analogoutput[Input type]Parameter input[Da...

  • Page 794

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 776 -5614Data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]700 - 1250Set data for adjusting t...

  • Page 795

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 777 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05607PLD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0PLDPLDPLDPLDSpecifies whether the spindle parameters ...

  • Page 796

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 778 -- When the spindle switch function is not used- Main spindle at spindle switchingCNC sideSpindle sideDescription3000Bit parameter(NOTE1)3001000Bit parameter(NOTE1)3002Bit...

  • Page 797

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 779 -CNC sideSpindle sideDescription3046036Proportional gain of the velocity loop in Cs contour control mode (high-speed gear)3047037Proportional gain of the...

  • Page 798

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 780 -CNC sideSpindle sideDescription3092082Rate of change in position gain at reference position return in Cs contour controlmode3093083Estimated-acceleration constant3094084D...

  • Page 799

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 781 -- When the spindle switch function is not used- For low-speed characteristics of the output switch function for the main spindle atspindle switchingCNC ...

  • Page 800

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 782 -- Sub-spindle at spindle switchingCNC sideSpindle sideDescription3176Bit parameter(NOTE1)3177168Bit parameter(NOTE1)3178Bit parameter(NOTE1)3179169Bit parameter(NOTE1)318...

  • Page 801

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 783 -CNC sideSpindle sideDescription3228210Stop position shift in orientation by a position coder3229211MS signal constant3230212MS signal gain adjustment323...

  • Page 802

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 784 -CNC sideSpindle sideDescription3275257Velocity at which maximum output limit is zero3276258Secondary current factor for rigid tapping3277259Compensation constant for the ...

  • Page 803

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 785 -- For low-speed characteristics of the output switch function for the sub-spindle atspindle switchingCNC sideSpindle sideDescription3284266Motor voltage...

  • Page 804

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 786 -CNC sideSpindle sideDescription333231633333173334318Speed detector optional pulse (main spindle)3335319Speed detector optional pulse (sub-spindle)3336320Magnetic flux swi...

  • Page 805

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 787 -- For expansionCNC sideSpindle sideDescription3352Bit parameter(NOTE 1)3353336Bit parameter(NOTE 1)33543373355338335633933573403358341335934233603433361...

  • Page 806

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 788 -Note 1)The data list at the CNC side corresponds to that at the spindle side, asfollows:CNC parameter numbers: Cn, Cn+1Spindle parameter number : SmSmCnCn+1Note 2)The d...

  • Page 807

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 789 -NumberMessageContentsSP0015SSPA:15 SPINDLE SWITCHINGFAULTAn alarm (AL-15) occurred on the spindle amplifier unitFor details, refer to the Serial Spindle...

  • Page 808

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 790 -NumberMessageContentsSP0045SSPA:XX DECODED ALARMAn alarm (AL-45) occurred on the spindle amplifier unitFor details, refer to the Serial Spindle User's Manual.SP0046SSPA:4...

  • Page 809

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 791 -NumberMessageContentsSP0228COMMUNICATION ERROR (SERIALSPINDLE)A communications error occurred between the CNC andthe serial spindle amplifier.SP0229COMM...

  • Page 810

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 792 -Reference itemSeries15i/150i-MODEL BConnection Manual(This manual)9.3Spindle controlFANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DescriptionsB-65282ENFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi serie...

  • Page 811

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 793 -9.3 SPINDLE CONTROLGeneralThis section describes spindle speed control. It also explains thepositioncoder.- Command flow of spindle speed controlOutlin...

  • Page 812

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 794 -Analog spindleSpindle motorOrientation, gearswitching, addition circuitD/A converterSpindle voltageoutputSpindle actualspeed watchingConstant spindlespeedContact point I/...

  • Page 813

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 795 -Serial spindleCommunicationcontrolSpindle voltagecalculationSpindle actualspeed watchingConstant spindlespeedContact point I/OCommand voltagecalculation...

  • Page 814

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 796 -- S commandThe S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machiningprograms, etc. for the CNC.The CNC outputs the specified S command as an S code to the PMC asis...

  • Page 815

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 797 -- Gear change processingIn response to a specified spindle speed, gear selection and changeprocessing is normally performed by the PMC. According to th...

  • Page 816

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 798 -- Electrical specification of analog spindle interfaceThe signals related to analog spindle interface are described below.The ENB1/2 signal is set to 1 if the command out...

  • Page 817

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 799 -SignalSignals common to analog and serial spindlesSpindle speed command signalRO0A-RO15A<F010,F011>:For 1st spindle RO0B-RO15B<F32...

  • Page 818

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 800 -Spindle motor command voltage signal RISGNA,RI0A to RI15A<G024,G025>:For 1st spindle RISGNB,RI0B to RI15B<G232,G233>:For 2nd spindle ...

  • Page 819

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 801 -Signal related to analog spindlesSpindle gear select signalGS1A,GS2A,GS4A<G026#4,#5,#6>:For 1st spindleGS1B,GS2B,GS4B<G272#4,#5,#6>:For 2nd ...

  • Page 820

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 802 -Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM0A to SLDM15A<F232,F233>:For 1st spindle SLDM0B to SLDM15B<F248,F249>:For 2nd spindle SLDM0C t...

  • Page 821

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 803 -Other signalsMiscelaneous function code signalM0 to M31<F016 to F019>Miscelaneous function strobeignalMF<F008#0>Fnish signalFIN<G005#1>...

  • Page 822

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 804 --For first spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G024RI7ARI6ARI5ARI4ARI3ARI2ARI1ARI0AG025RISGNARI12ARI11ARI10ARI9ARI8AG026GS4AGS2AGS1AG227CTH1ACTH2AF010RO7ARO6ARO5ARO4ARO3ARO2ARO1ARO0AF...

  • Page 823

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 805 --For 2nd spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G232RI7BRI6BRI5BRI4BRI3BRI2BRI1BRI0BG233RISGNBRI12BRI11BRI10BRI9BRI8BG235CTH1BCTH2BG272GS4BGS2BGS1BF248SLDM7BSLDM6BSLDM5...

  • Page 824

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 806 --For 3rd spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G208RI7CRI6CRI5CRI4CRI3CRI2CRI1CRI0CG209RISGNCRI12CRI11CRI10CRI9CRI8CG211CTH1CCTH2CG273GS4CGS2CGS1CF200SLDM7CSLDM6CSLDM5CSLDM4CSLDM3CSLDM2...

  • Page 825

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 807 -- For 4th spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G216RI7DRI6DRI5DRI4DRI3DRI2DRI1DRI0DG217RISGNDRI12DRI11DRI10DRI9DRI8DG219CTH1DCTH2DG274GS4DGS2DGS1DF216SLDM7DSLDM6DSLDM...

  • Page 826

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 808 -Parameter- Analog/serial spindle common setting#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02204NOS[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0NOSNOSNOSNOSSpecifies whether t...

  • Page 827

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 809 -5611Number of samples of sampling data for obtaining the mean spindle speed[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]0 - 4Th...

  • Page 828

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 810 -5842Number of pulses of the position coder[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the number of pul...

  • Page 829

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 811 -- Analog spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05603NDP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7NDPNDPNDPNDPSpecifies whether to make...

  • Page 830

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 812 -5614Data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]700 - 1250Set data for adjusting t...

  • Page 831

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 813 -Alarm and message-PS alarmNumberMessageContentsPS0223ILLEGAL SPINDLE SELECTAn attempt was made to execute an instruction that usesthe spindle although t...

  • Page 832

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 814 -9.4 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROLGeneralWhen a surface speed (m/min or feet/min) is specified after an S code,the spindle speed is controlled to keep the surface speed c...

  • Page 833

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 815 -SignalSpindle speed command signal RO0A-RO15A<F010,F011>:For 1st spindleRO0B-RO15B<F320,F321>:For 2nd spindleRO0C-RO15C<F326,...

  • Page 834

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 816 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F001CSS#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F010RO7ARO6ARO5ARO4ARO3ARO2ARO1ARO0A#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F011RO15ARO14ARO13ARO12ARO11ARO10ARO09ARO08A#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F014M...

  • Page 835

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 817 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02402SMX[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6SMXSMXSMXSMXS code instructed in the sa...

  • Page 836

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 818 - # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6RSCRSCRSCRSCSpecifies whether to use the current position for a positioning command(such as G00) under constant surface speed control.0: Use.1...

  • Page 837

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 819 -5844Axis number subject to constant surface speed control[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]0 - Max axesS...

  • Page 838

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 820 -9.5 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUTGeneralBased on a feedback signal from a position coder mounted on a spindle,the CNC calculates the spindle speed and outputs it to the PMC...

  • Page 839

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 821 -- For fourth spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F334AR7DAR6DAR5DAR4DAR3DAR2DAR1DAR0DF335AR15DAR14DAR13DAR12DAR11DAR10DAR9DAR8DParameter5612Unit of spind...

  • Page 840

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 822 -9.6 SPINDLE POSITIONINGGeneralThis function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and positioncoder.The function has a coarser least command increment compared wi...

  • Page 841

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 823 -- Control block diagramThe spindle positioning function is enabled only when the number ofpulses from the position coder is 4096, and the gear ratio bet...

  • Page 842

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 824 -Setting example 1:Servo axis: X, Y, ZSpindle positioning axis: C (S1)Number of spindles: 1Controlled-axis No.Parameter1020Parameter1023Parameter1027188(X)10289(Y)20390(Z...

  • Page 843

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 825 -- Orientation speedWhen an analog spindle is used, the tool moves at the rapid traverserate set in parameter No. 5977 until a speed that allows orientat...

  • Page 844

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 826 -- Program originThe orientation position is regarded as a program origin. It is possibleto modify the program origin using the coordinates system(G92).Command systemThe c...

  • Page 845

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 827 -Command methodAddress usedand G-codeCommand of A-Bon the above figureAbsolute commandDirect the end point position bythe distance from the programorigin...

  • Page 846

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 828 -SignalSignals for the spindle positioning functionSpindle unclamp signal SUCLPA<F042#0>:for 1st spindleSUCLPB<F338#0>:for 2nd spindleSUCLPC<F339#0>:for ...

  • Page 847

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 829 -Signals related to miscellaneous function code outputMiscellaneous code signalM0-M31<F016-F019>Miscellaneous strobe signalMF<F008#0>Finish s...

  • Page 848

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 830 -Other signalsSpindle stop confirmation signalSPSTPA<G026#0>:for 1st spindleSPSTPB<G272#0>:for 2nd spindleSPSTPC<G273#0>:for 3rd spindleSPSTPD<G274#0&...

  • Page 849

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 831 -- For 1st spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G026GS4AGS2AGS1A *SECLPA*SEUCLASPSTPAG227CTH1ACTH2AF042SCLPA SUCLPA- For 2nd spindl#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G272GS4BGS2BGS1B *SE...

  • Page 850

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 832 -Sequence (time chart)Spindle orientationTo cancel spindle rotation mode then enter spindle positioning mode,specify Mxx in a program.xx must be set in parameter No. 5680 ...

  • Page 851

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 833 -14. When spindle clamp signal SCLPs is set to 1, the PMC clamps thespindle mechanically by using, for example, the clutch or a shotpin. After clamping,...

  • Page 852

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 834 - Timing chart for orientation (sequence pattern 1) M COMMAND Mxx Strobe signal MF Spindle stop confirmation signal SPSTPs Spindle position controlSpindle position ...

  • Page 853

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 835 - Timing chart for orientation (sequence pattern 2) M command Mxx Strobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpi...

  • Page 854

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 836 - Timing chart for orientation (sequence pattern 3)M command MxxStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle position contro...

  • Page 855

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 837 - Timing chart for orientation (sequence pattern 4)M command MxxStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpind...

  • Page 856

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 838 -Spindle positioningIn spindle positioning mode, positioning is performed using one of thefollowing two methods:1)Semi-fixed angle positioning by specifying Myy2)Arbitrary...

  • Page 857

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 839 -13. When spindle clamp completion signal *SECLPs is set to 0, theCNC sets spindle clamp signal SCLPs to 0 to indicate that theCNC has received *SECLPs.1...

  • Page 858

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 840 - Timing chart for positioning (sequence pattern 1) M command Myy Strobe signal MF Spindle stop confirmation signal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle position con...

  • Page 859

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 841 -Timing chart for positioning (sequence pattern 2)M command MyyStrobe signal MF Spindle stop confirmation signal SPSTPsSpindle positioncontrolSpindle...

  • Page 860

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 842 -Timing chart for positioning (sequence pattern 3)M command MyyStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle position controlse...

  • Page 861

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 843 -Timing chart for positioning (sequence pattern 4)M command MyyStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindl...

  • Page 862

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 844 -Canceling spindle positioningTo cancel spindle positioning mode and enter spindle rotation mode,specify Mzz in a program.zz must be set in parameter No. 5681 in advance. ...

  • Page 863

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 845 -Timing chart for canceling positioning (sequence patterns 1 and 2)M command MzzStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmation signal SPSTPsSpindle posi...

  • Page 864

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 846 -Timing chart for canceling positioning (sequence patterns 3)M command MzzStrobe signal MFSpindle stop confirmationsignal SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle posit...

  • Page 865

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 847 - CAUTIONThe CNC performs servo-on/off control in positioncontrol for an analog spindle by using the ENB1 andENB2 signals. Therefore, to perform the ser...

  • Page 866

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 848 -Parameter- Common to analog and serial spindles#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01005PLZALZZMGZRN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ZRNZRNZRNZRNSpecif...

  • Page 867

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 849 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006DIAROPROSROT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ROTROTROTROTSpecifies whether the axis requires...

  • Page 868

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 850 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01012ISEISDISCISA[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]BitaxisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for the s...

  • Page 869

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 851 -1020Program axis name for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]65 - 90The programmed axis name of each controlled...

  • Page 870

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 852 -1027Spindle number of a spindle positioning axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for the setting to become effective.[I...

  • Page 871

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 853 -1260Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incre...

  • Page 872

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 854 -1621FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapidtraverse along each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, i...

  • Page 873

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 855 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05605IOR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4IORIORIORIORSpecifies whether to cancel the spindle p...

  • Page 874

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 856 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05809IOEAIT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0AITAITAITAITSpecifies whether to enable or disable axis-by-axis inte...

  • Page 875

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 857 -5853Backlash compensation in the servo mode (first stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data ran...

  • Page 876

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 858 -5858Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (third stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the number of te...

  • Page 877

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 859 -5863Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fifth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - ...

  • Page 878

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 860 -5868Backlash compensation in the servo mode (sixth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]-9999 - 9999Set...

  • Page 879

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 861 -5873Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (eighth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767S...

  • Page 880

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 862 -5895Operation sequence pattern for the spindle positioning axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 4Set an operation sequence patter...

  • Page 881

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 863 -5897M code for semi-fixed angular positioning (Max)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]6 - 97Set an M code (end) speci...

  • Page 882

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 864 -5960Position gain in the servo mode[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]0.01/sec[Valid data range]1 - 9999Set an analog spindle position gain...

  • Page 883

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 865 -5961Position gain multiplier (first stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 884

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 866 -5963Position gain multiplier (second stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 885

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 867 -5965Position gain multiplier (third stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 886

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 868 -5967Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 887

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 869 -5969Position gain multiplier (fifth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 888

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 870 -5971Position gain multiplier (sixth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog sp...

  • Page 889

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 871 -5973Position gain multiplier (seventh stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multipl...

  • Page 890

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 872 -5975Position gain multiplier (eighth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 891

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 873 -5977Rapid traverse rate for orientation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realspindle[Unit of data]degree/min[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incr...

  • Page 892

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 874 -5980Grid shift value for orientation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]-2048 - 2048Set a grid shift value f...

  • Page 893

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 875 -3045Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode/synchronization controlmode (low-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindl...

  • Page 894

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 876 -3057Gear ratio (medium high-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]Motor speed per spindle rotation*100[Valid data range]0 - 32767Se...

  • Page 895

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 877 -3066Position gain in servo mode/synchronization control mode(medium high-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]0....

  • Page 896

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 878 -Alarm and message- PS alarmNumberMessageContentsPS0181ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHEDA move instruction was issued to an axis in which the zeroreturn instruction was instructed ...

  • Page 897

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 879 -Caution CAUTION 1 During the operations required for spindle positioning (operations for cancelingspindle rotation mode and entering spindle positioning...

  • Page 898

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 880 -NoteNOTE1 An M code related to spindle positioning must be specified ina block containing no other commands. In that block, noother commands may be specified.2 An axis a...

  • Page 899

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 881 -9.7 Cs CONTOUR CONTROLGeneralA spindle motor controlled by the spindle serial output function iscalled a serial spindle.For a serial spindle, positionin...

  • Page 900

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 882 -Command addressAny address can be selected for a Cs contour control move command.The value set for parameter No. 1020 is used as the axis name.Switching between spindle r...

  • Page 901

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 883 -Switching from spindle rotation control to Cs contourcontrol or vice versa may be performed in a block duringautomatic operation. In this case, the pos...

  • Page 902

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 884 -Set the direction of reference position return using CSO (bit 3 ofparameter No. 3000).-Stopping reference position return(i) For manual operationWhen the reset, emergency...

  • Page 903

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 885 -Cs contour control mode switching confirmation signalsMSCNTR1, MSCNTR2, MSCNTR3, ... <F067#7, F071#7, F075#7, ...>[Classification]Output signal[Fu...

  • Page 904

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 886 -Serial spindle clutch/gear signalsCTH1A, CTH2A<G227#3, #2>: for 1st spindleCTH1B, CTH2B<G235#3, #2>: for 2nd spindleCTH1C, CTH2C<G211#3, #2>: for 3rd...

  • Page 905

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 887 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G067SCNTR1G227CTH1ACTH2AG235CTH1BCTH2BG211CTH1CCTH2CG219CTH1DCTH2DF064ZP1F067MSCNTR1ParameterMain related parameters are s...

  • Page 906

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 888 - # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3PLZPLZPLZPLZSpecifies the condition for presetting the work coordinate system whenmanual reference position return is performed.0: Preset only...

  • Page 907

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 889 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01012ISEISDISCISA[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0ISAISAISAISA # # # # 1111ISCISCI...

  • Page 908

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 890 -1020Program axis name for each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]65 - 90The programmed axis name of each controlled axis is set accor...

  • Page 909

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 891 -1028Spindle number of a Cs contour control axisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback on for the setting to be...

  • Page 910

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 892 -1260Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the...

  • Page 911

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 893 -1621FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapidtraverse along each axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit...

  • Page 912

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 894 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02203MCN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1MCNMCNMCNMCNThe machine positions are displayed on the CRT:0: In millimeters f...

  • Page 913

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 895 -3054Integral gain of the velocity loop in Cs contour control mode(high-speed gear)3055Integral gain of the velocity loop in Cs contour control mode(low-...

  • Page 914

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 896 -3105Proportional gain data of the current loop in Cs contour control mode3107Integral gain data of the current loop in Cs contour control mode[Input type]Parameter input[...

  • Page 915

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 897 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05821STJ[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2STJSTJSTJSTJSpecifies when to stop returning the Cs c...

  • Page 916

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 898 -5881Positional deviation limit during a stop under Cs contour control[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]0 -...

  • Page 917

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 899 -Caution CAUTION1 In Cs contour control mode, do not switch the spindlegear. Switch the spindle gear in spindle rotation controlmode when required.2 Str...

  • Page 918

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 900 -9.8 RIGID TAPPINGGeneralIn tapping, the feed amount along the Z-axis per spindle rotation mustequal the thread pitch of the tapper. Therefore, the most desirabletapping s...

  • Page 919

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 901 -Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position CoderAs shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between thespindle and spindle motor (n:m...

  • Page 920

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 902 -Example) For position coder built-in type spindle motorParameterNo.Set valueMeaning585270Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the spindle side585550Number of teeth of the ...

  • Page 921

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 903 -Spindle speed range (normal machining)GearLower limitUpper limitLow-speedgear1 revolutionMaximum low-speed gear speed Maximum spindle motor speed×L%= ...

  • Page 922

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 904 -Rigid Tapping Specification- Feed rateIn rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F;the spindle speed is S times 360(deg/min). Override is inva...

  • Page 923

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 905 -Example :Linear acceleration/deceleration when the time constant is not changedTime constant TC = 800 msec and speed S = 4000 min-1 are set inparameters...

  • Page 924

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 906 -- OverrideOverride is invalid for rigid tapping. Override (1 to 200%) can beapplied to withdrawal operations by setting parameter No. 5883.- Dry runDry run is enabled. W...

  • Page 925

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 907 -- Backlash compensationIn rigid tapping mode, backlash compensation is performed tocompensate for lost motion upon forward and reverse spindle rotation....

  • Page 926

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 908 -- Positional deviation limitsIn rigid tapping mode, the position gain for the tapping axis is changed.The following illustrates when the position gain is changed, and the...

  • Page 927

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 909 -Command format- G84 .2 (Rigid tapping cycle)The rigid tapping mode cancel command is G80:. Rigid tapping cyclemode is also canceled by issuing another ...

  • Page 928

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 910 -- G84 .3 (Left-handed Rigid Tapping Cycle)SpindleCCWG84.3(G98)G84.3(G99)G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ S_ ;X_ Y_: Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to th...

  • Page 929

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 911 -- Orientation functionBefore rigid tapping, spindle orientation can be performed.After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, rapid traverse is performedt...

  • Page 930

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 912 -- Peck Rigid Tapping CycleTapping a deep hole in rigid tapping mode may be difficult due to chipssticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance. In such cases, the...

  • Page 931

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 913 -Rigid tapping command in feed-per-minute/feed-per-revolution modeRigid tapping may be specified in feed-per-minute mode (G94) or inthe feed-per-revoluti...

  • Page 932

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 914 -SignalSignals for the rigid tapping functionRigid tapping in-progress signal RTAP<F040#4>[Classification]Output signal[Function]This signal notifies the PMC that ri...

  • Page 933

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 915 -Reverse spindle rotation signal RSPR<G148#3>[Classification]Input signal[Function]When the rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) or reverse rigid tapping cy...

  • Page 934

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 916 - CAUTIONEven when the status of the reverse spindle rotationsignal is changed in rigid tapping mode, the change isignored. To change the direction of the spindlerotation...

  • Page 935

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 917 -Signals related to S code outputSpindle function code signalS0-S31<F020-F023>Spindle function strobe signalSF<F008#1>Completion signalFIN<...

  • Page 936

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 918 -Other signalsSpindle stop confirmation signal SPSTPA<G026#0>:For 1st spindleSPSTPB<G272#0>:For 2nd spindleSPSTPC<G273#0>:For 3rd spindleSPSTPD<G274#0...

  • Page 937

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 919 -- For 3rd spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G211CTH1CCTH2CG273GS4CGS2CGS1CSPSTPC- For 4th spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G219CTH1DCTH2DG274GS4DGS2DGS1DSPSTPD

  • Page 938

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 920 -Sequence(Time chart)The following is an example of the PMC processing procedure usedwhen rigid tapping is specified:1.Assume that the G84.2 command is specified. The spi...

  • Page 939

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 921 -command SRV to be sent to the spindle amplifier at the sametime.Resetting all the spindle motor command signals to 0 sets thespindle speed voltage sent ...

  • Page 940

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 922 -subsequent G84.2 commands are executed, the control mode for thespindle is already set to position control mode, so the control modechange processing in 5 is not performe...

  • Page 941

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 923 - G84.2 command G80 S100 M04 command Signal RTAPMoving of the Xand Y axes, Movingof the Z axis to R pointRI0s to RI12sSFRSRVSST(TLML)(for analog amp.)S...

  • Page 942

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 924 -Parameter- Common to analog and serial spindles1837Positioning deviation limit while the tool is moving in the rigid tapping mode[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Int...

  • Page 943

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 925 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#05608RSR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitspindle # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4RSRRSRRSRRSRSpecifies whether the relationships of G8...

  • Page 944

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 926 -5752FL feedrate at acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and drilling axis inrigid tapping (fixed)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realspindle[Unit of data]mm/min...

  • Page 945

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 927 -5804Allowable range for constant spindle speed signal output in exponentialacceleration/deceleration[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle...

  • Page 946

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 928 -5842Number of pulses of the position coder[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the number of pul...

  • Page 947

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 929 -5855Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (second stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767S...

  • Page 948

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 930 -5860Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fourth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the numb...

  • Page 949

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 931 -5865Backlash compensation in the servo mode (fifth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data ran...

  • Page 950

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 932 -5870Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (seventh stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the number of ...

  • Page 951

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 933 -5875Effective area in the servo mode using a position coder[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data r...

  • Page 952

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 934 -5877Positional deviation limit during a stop in the servo mode using a positioncoder[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid...

  • Page 953

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 935 -5886Spindle speed for determining cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in rigidtapping (S1)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit o...

  • Page 954

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 936 -5889Spindle speed for determining cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in rigidtapping (S2)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]min-1[Valid...

  • Page 955

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 937 -5892Spindle speed for determining cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in rigidtapping (S3)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit o...

  • Page 956

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 938 -5894Cutting feed FL feedrate for the drilling axis in rigid tapping (FL4)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realspindle[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (mach...

  • Page 957

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 939 -Acceleration/deceleration timeTC4TC3TC2TC1 S1 S2 S3 ScommandRelationship between S command andactual acceleration/deceleration timein l...

  • Page 958

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 940 - # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3RFARFARFARFASpecifies whether to issue an alarm for an F command that hassignificant fractional digits specified in rigid tapping.0: Do not is...

  • Page 959

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 941 -5961Position gain multiplier (first stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 960

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 942 -5963Position gain multiplier (second stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 961

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 943 -5965Position gain multiplier (third stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 962

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 944 -5967Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 963

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 945 -5969Position gain multiplier (fifth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplie...

  • Page 964

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 946 -5971Position gain multiplier (sixth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog sp...

  • Page 965

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 947 -5973Position gain multiplier (seventh stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multipl...

  • Page 966

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 948 -5975Position gain multiplier (eighth stage)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set the position gain multiplier of the analog s...

  • Page 967

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 949 -5977Rapid traverse rate for orientation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realspindle[Unit of data]degree/min[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incr...

  • Page 968

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 950 -5980Grid shift value for orientation[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]-2048 - 2048Set a grid shift value f...

  • Page 969

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 951 -3045Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode/synchronization control mode (low-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspind...

  • Page 970

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 952 -3057Gear ratio (medium high-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]Motor speed per spindle rotation×100[Valid data range]0 - 32767S...

  • Page 971

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 953 -3066Position gain in servo mode/synchronization control mode(medium high-speed gear)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integerspindle[Unit of data]0....

  • Page 972

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 954 -Alarm and message- PS alarmNumberMessageContentsPS0223ILLEGAL SPINDLE SELECTAn attempt was made to execute an instruction that uses thespindle although the spindle to be ...

  • Page 973

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 955 -CautionNOTES ON SPINDLESCaution CAUTION When an analog spindle is used, set driftcompensation parameters (parameter Nos. 5962 to5976) accurately. If an...

  • Page 974

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 956 -Position control loop gain switching and serial spindle parametersIn rigid tapping, the position gain for the tapping axis is changedaccording to the position gain for th...

  • Page 975

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 957 -3044Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode/synchronization control mode (high-speed gear)3045Proportional gain of the velocity loop in ser...

  • Page 976

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 958 -9.8.1 Rigid Tapping Additional Function- Overview-A parameter can be used to specify whether to perform spindleorientation when rigid tapping is started.-A parameter can ...

  • Page 977

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 959 -5711Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (first stage)5712Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (second stage)5713Maximum spindle speed durin...

  • Page 978

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 960 -- Diagnostic data1600Rigid tapping spindle positional deviation[Data type]Integer spindle[Unit of data]Spindle detection unitThis parameter specifies an instantaneous spi...

  • Page 979

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 961 -9.9 SPINDLE ORIENTATIONGeneralThis function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle canbe stopped in either of the following two ways.-T...

  • Page 980

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 962 -Signal address- For 1st spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G230SH7ASH6ASH5ASH4ASH3ASH2ASH1ASH0AG231SH12ASH11ASH10ASH9ASH8A- For 2nd spindle#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G238SH7BSH6BSH5BSH4BSH3BSH2...

  • Page 981

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 963 -Caution CAUTION 1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindlecontrol unit, the signals of the spindle control unitmust be used.To perform serial...

  • Page 982

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 964 -9.10 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHINGGeneralSpindle output switching switches between the two windings, one forlow speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the speci...

  • Page 983

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 965 -9.11 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTIONGeneralIf the actual spindle speed becomes lower or higher than that specifiedbecause of the condition of the ma...

  • Page 984

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 966 - - Specified spindle speedA spindle speed to be specified for spindle speed fluctuation detectionis determined as described below.For the spindle motor and each spindle ...

  • Page 985

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 967 - - Actual spindle speedThe actual spindle speed is calculated from the feedback pulse receivedfrom the position coder mounted on the spindle. - Condit...

  • Page 986

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 968 - - Examples of alarms issued for spindle speed fluctuation detection1) Example where an alarm is issued after the specified spindle speedis reached2) Example in which a...

  • Page 987

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 969 - - System with more than one spindleIn a system with more than one spindle, spindle speed fluctuationdetection is performed for the spindle described b...

  • Page 988

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 970 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02409G26[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4G26Specifies whether G25 or G26 mode is selected when the power isswitched on, or in a cle...

  • Page 989

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 971 -5722Time (p) allowed from when the specified spindle speed is changed untilspindle speed fluctuation detection begins[Input type]Parameter input[Data ty...

  • Page 990

    9.SPINDLE FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 972 -9.12 SPINDLE WARNING DETAILED SIGNALSOverviewAn alarm was added to the spindle amplifier αi series. The alarm uses asignal to indicate a warning status in advance.If the...

  • Page 991

    B-63783EN-1/01 9.SPINDLE FUNCTION- 973 -Each spindle warning detail signal becomes "0" only after all relatedalarm causes are cleared.If a warning occurs on more than one spindle, a ...

  • Page 992

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 974 -10 TOOL FUNCTION

  • Page 993

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 975 -10.1 TOOL FUNCTIONGeneralA tool can be selected by specifying its tool number following addressT. The tool number consists of a numeric value of no m...

  • Page 994

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 976 -SignalSee Section 8.1.Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02003TSN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2TSNTSNTSNTSNSpecifies whether a minus (-) can...

  • Page 995

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 977 -10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATIONNUMBER/TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORYGeneralTool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values...

  • Page 996

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 978 -- NUMBER OF TOOL COMPENSATION SETTINGS(1) 32 tool compensation settingsApplicable offset Nos. (D code/H code) are 0 to 32.D00 to D32 or H00 to H32(2) 99 tool compensati...

  • Page 997

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 979 -(3) Tool compensation memory CThe memory for geometric compensation and that for wearcompensation are separated in the tool compensation memory C.The ...

  • Page 998

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 980 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06002OFCOFA#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06004OFD#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06007OFE[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]BitThe increment system and valid setting range of tool of...

  • Page 999

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 981 -10.2.1 Specification of Diameter Entry for Tool Compensation ValueExplanation of specificationThe tool compensation value recorded in CNC offset memor...

  • Page 1000

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 982 -10.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONGeneralTools are grouped and the tool life (use count or use time) ispredetermined for each group. Each time a tool belonging to a gr...

  • Page 1001

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 983 -Tool life management dataTool life management data consists of tool group numbers, toolnumbers, codes specifying tool compensation values, and tool li...

  • Page 1002

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 984 -- Tool offset specification codeTwo types of tool offset specification codes are used: H code (for toollength compensation) and D code (for cutter compensation). A num...

  • Page 1003

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 985 -Tool service life count and tool selectionA count-based or time-based tool service life count system is selectedusing bit 3 (LTM) of parameter No. 740...

  • Page 1004

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 986 -Tool life count restart M codeWith the count-based tool life count system, when the tool life countrestart M code is specified and the life of at least one tool group h...

  • Page 1005

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 987 -subsequently specified in a program, the first tool is selected again.If a group specified by the tool group signal (TL1 to TL512)contains a tool whos...

  • Page 1006

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 988 -Tool skip signal TLSKP<G009#7>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Directs the control unit to skip a tool whose service life has not beenreached and selects th...

  • Page 1007

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 989 -New tool select signal TLCHB<F007#7>[Classification]Output signal[Function]This signal notifies the PMC that a new tool in a group is selected. ...

  • Page 1008

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 990 -TL512 TL256 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16TL8TL4TL2TL1Tool grpupnumber000000000010000000001200000000103000000001140000000100500000010011000000011101500000100112000000111013000001...

  • Page 1009

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 991 -Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9<G155#0, G155#1, G154>[Classification]Input signal[Function]If time is specified as the life cou...

  • Page 1010

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 992 - Life end group select signalTLEGS<F043#5>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Posts notification that a tool group whose life has expired is selected.[Output c...

  • Page 1011

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 993 -Life arrival signal TLARV<F043#4>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Posts that the service life of a selected tool group has ended.[Output c...

  • Page 1012

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 994 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G009TLSKPTL64TL32TL16TL08TL04TL02TL01G010TLRSTG042TL256G043TL128TL512G154*TLV7*TLV6*TLV5*TLV4*TLV3*TLV2*TLV1*TLV0G155*TLV9*TLV8#7#6#5#4#3#...

  • Page 1013

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 995 - # # # # 2222SIGSIGSIGSIGSpecifies whether to specify a group number for tool skip by using asignal.0: Do not specify.1: Specify.NOTEIf...

  • Page 1014

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 996 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07401TRUTRSLFVEMDCT2CT1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # # # # 0000CT1CT1CT1CT1 # # # # 1111CT2CT2CT2CT2A tool ch...

  • Page 1015

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 997 - # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6TRUTRUTRUTRUSpecifies how to handle a cutting time less than 1 second when lifecounting is based on time (LTM = 1), and th...

  • Page 1016

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 998 -7442M code used to restart tool life counting[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]From 0 through 99999999 (Excluding 01, 02, 30, 98, 99 and ca...

  • Page 1017

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 999 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0437ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBERA tool group number exceeded the maximum value.The tool group No. (P after G10 L3...

  • Page 1018

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1000 -10.4 TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION10.4.1 Tool Length OffsetGeneralThis function can be used by setting the difference between the toollength assumed during programming an...

  • Page 1019

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1001 -- Specification of the tool length offset valueThe tool length offset value assigned to the number (offset number)specified in the H code is selected...

  • Page 1020

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1002 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02409K43[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5K43K43K43K43Specifies whether to clear the tool length compensation vector,...

  • Page 1021

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1003 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06007ZMV[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # # # # 5555ZMVZMVZMVZMVWhen the offset of tool length compensation i...

  • Page 1022

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1004 -10.4.2 Tool OffsetGeneralThe programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased ordecreased by a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value.The tool...

  • Page 1023

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1005 -- Increase and decreaseAs shown in Fig. 10.4.2(a), the travel distance of the tool is increased ordecreased by the specified tool offset value.In the...

  • Page 1024

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1006 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06000PCIPNHEVO[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0EVOEVOEVOEVOSpecifies whether an offset change is valid star...

  • Page 1025

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1007 -10.4.3 Cutter CompensationGeneralWhen the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of thetool (Fig. 10.4.3(a)).To make an offset as ...

  • Page 1026

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1008 -- Offset cancel modeAt the beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancelmode. In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool centerpath coinci...

  • Page 1027

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1009 -- Offset vectorThe offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to thecutter compensation value assigned by D code. It is calculated in...

  • Page 1028

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1010 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06001CNICNCCSU[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # # # # 0000CSUCSUCSUCSUThis bit, used with bit 7 (CSC) of parameter No....

  • Page 1029

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1011 - # # # # 1111CNCCNCCNCCNCThis bit, used with bit 6 (CNI) of parameter No. 6001, selects the methodfor making an interference check in ...

  • Page 1030

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1012 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06005AIM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1AIMAIMAIMAIMSpecifies whether to issue an alarm when cutter compensation is...

  • Page 1031

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1013 - # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6NAANAANAANAAIf the interference check avoidance function judges that the avoidanceoperation will be dangerous or that fur...

  • Page 1032

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1014 -6010Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter compensation[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of...

  • Page 1033

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1015 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0270CRC:START_UP /CANCEL BYCIRCLEAn attempt was made to execute the cutter compensationstartup or cancel blo...

  • Page 1034

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1016 -10.4.4 Three-dimensional Tool CompensationGeneralIn cutter compensation, two-dimensional offset is performed for aselected plane. In three-dimensional tool compensatio...

  • Page 1035

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1017 -- Three-dimensional tool compensation vectorIn three-dimensional tool compensation mode, the following three-dimensional tool compensation vector is ...

  • Page 1036

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1018 -- Specifying I, J, and KAddresses I, J, and K must all be specified at startup to start three-dimensional tool compensation. When even one of the three addressesis om...

  • Page 1037

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1019 -NOTE1 When bit 0 (ONI) of parameter No. 6029 is 1, thefunctions using the I, J, and K commands listedbelow must not be used in three-dimensional tool...

  • Page 1038

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1020 -Parameter6011Constant denominator for three-dimensional tool compensation or toollength compensation in a specified direction[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[U...

  • Page 1039

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1021 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06030OKI[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0OKIOKIOKIOKIThe I, J, and K commands in three-dimensional...

  • Page 1040

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1022 -10.4.5 Tool Offsets Based on Tool NumbersGeneralCutter compensation data, tool length compensation data, and the toolpot number can be set for a specific tool number (...

  • Page 1041

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1023 -- Adding and modifying tool dataFormatMeaning of commandG10L71;T-P-K-R-;T-P-K-R-; :T-P-K-R-;G11;M02(M30);G10L71:Starts the addition to or modificati...

  • Page 1042

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1024 -Tool Offset Based on Tool Numbers- Tool pot number outputWhen a tool number (T code) is specified, the corresponding tool potnumber is read from the tool data file, th...

  • Page 1043

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1025 -- Tool change methodsThe execution of an M code for tool change and tool number (T code)that are specified in the same block depends on the settings ...

  • Page 1044

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1026 -Example- Tool change method AExample:N01 T10 ; : The tool pot number corresponding to T10 is output as a code signal.N02 M06 T11 ;: The cutter compensation value and t...

  • Page 1045

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1027 -- Notification output to the machine when tools having the same pot number arespecifiedIf there are two or more programmed tool numbers having the sa...

  • Page 1046

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1028 -Example :Tool life management dataTool offset data based on tool numbersProgram (the tool life management ignore number is 1000, and the M code for toolchange is 6.)N1...

  • Page 1047

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1029 -- Automatic tool length measurementWith the automatic tool length measurement command (G37), the toollength compensation value for the currently vali...

  • Page 1048

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1030 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02203TLN[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4TLNTLNTLNTLNT codes displayed on the program check screen and T codes that ...

  • Page 1049

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1031 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07401CT2CT1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # # # # 0000CT1CT1CT1CT1 # # # # 1111CT2CT2CT2CT2A ...

  • Page 1050

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1032 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0421SETTING COMMAND ERRORThe instruction for setting tool data (G10L70 to G11,G10L71 to G11) is in error.PS0422NOT FOUND TOOL D...

  • Page 1051

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1033 -10.4.6 Tool Axis Direction Tool Length CompensationGeneralWhen a five-axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used,tool length compen...

  • Page 1052

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1034 -- Examples of machine configuration and rotation axis calculation formatsLet Vx, Vy, Vz, Lc, a, b, and c be as follows:Vx,Vy,Vz: Tool compensation vectors along the X-...

  • Page 1053

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1035 -(2) B-axis and C-axis, with the tool axis on the Z-axisCBZYXWorkpieceCBVx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c)Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c)Vz = Lc * cos(b)(3) A-axis a...

  • Page 1054

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1036 -(4) A-axis and B-axis, with the tool axis on the Z-axis, and the B-axisused as the masterBAZYXWorkpieceBAVx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b)Vy = -Lc * sin(a)Vz = Lc * cos(a) * c...

  • Page 1055

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1037 -- Tool holder offsetThe machine-specific length from the rotation center of the toolrotation axes (A- and B-axes, A- and C-axes, and B- and C-axes) t...

  • Page 1056

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1038 -- Rotation axis offsetSet offsets relative to the rotation angles of the rotation axes inparameter No. 7517. The compensation vector calculation formula isthe same as...

  • Page 1057

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1039 -- Machine coordinate system positioning (G53)When machine coordinate system positioning (G53) is performed, thecompensation vector is temporarily can...

  • Page 1058

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1040 -1029Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 - Max axesWhen a rotation axis ...

  • Page 1059

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1041 -7514Tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - 3Enter the tool axis direction when the two rotation axes a...

  • Page 1060

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1042 -7517Offset value for angular displacement of a rotation axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incre...

  • Page 1061

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1043 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0360PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE(TLAC)Illegal parameter setting. (Set value is out of range.)PS0361PARAMTER SETTING...

  • Page 1062

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1044 -10.4.7 Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture OffsetGeneralIf the position of a workpiece is set as a reference fixture offset withrespect to the position of the rotary table, a...

  • Page 1063

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1045 -- Operation upon a resetThe setting of the KWZ bit (bit 6 of parameter 2409) determineswhether the fixture offset is cancelled upon a reset. If the ...

  • Page 1064

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1046 -When 0 is specified, movement is made.(The workpiece coordinates of the current position do not change,and the corresponding machine coordinates change.)When 1 is spec...

  • Page 1065

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1047 -(5) Input from external equipmentWhen the read soft key is selected on the fixture offset screen,data can be input from external equipment such as a ...

  • Page 1066

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1048 -- If manual intervention is made on the rotation axisIf automatic operation is stopped by a SBK stop or similar in G54.2mode, and if manual movement is made about the ...

  • Page 1067

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1049 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01007FAX[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0FAXFAXFAXFAXSpecifies whether the fixture of...

  • Page 1068

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1050 -6068Rotation axis for fixture offset (first group)6069Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (first group)6070Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (first group)6071Rotation axis...

  • Page 1069

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1051 -10.4.8 Three-dimensional Cutter CompensationGeneralThe three-dimensional cutter compensation function is used withmachines that can contr...

  • Page 1070

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1052 -Parameter(1) Parameters setting the relationship between the rotation axis and rotation plane with which the tool iscontrolled(1) Relationship between the rotation axi...

  • Page 1071

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1053 -6084Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (first group)[Input type]Parameter i...

  • Page 1072

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1054 -6089Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (second group)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of d...

  • Page 1073

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1055 -- The rotation axis rotates about an axis that perpendicularlyintersects the plane formed by linear axis 1 and linear axis 2.- When the r...

  • Page 1074

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1056 -6104Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cuttercompensation and so forth (first group)6105Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimens...

  • Page 1075

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1057 -6106Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane formed by linear axes 2 and 3(RA)6107Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane fo...

  • Page 1076

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1058 -Linear axis 2Linear axis 1Linear axis 3When tool axis andlinear axis 3 matchRA = 0.0RB = 0.0Linear axis 2Linear axis 1Linear axis 3When tool axis andlinear axis 1 matc...

  • Page 1077

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1059 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00014NIC[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5NICNICNICNICSpecifies whether to perform an int...

  • Page 1078

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1060 -6115Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge offset[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]degree[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the incr...

  • Page 1079

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1061 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0271CRC:PLANE CHANGEAn attempt was made to change the plane in the cuttercompensation mode.To cha...

  • Page 1080

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1062 -10.4.8.1 Three-dimensional cutter compensation at tool center pointFor machines with a rotation axis for rotating a tool, this functionperforms three-dimensional cutte...

  • Page 1081

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1063 -Program-specifiedpoint (pivot point)WorkpieceTool centerTool sideDistance from program-specifiedpoint (pivot point) to cutting point(set ...

  • Page 1082

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1064 -Parameters(1) Parameters defining the relationship between the rotation axis for controlling the tool and the rotationplane1. Relationship between rotation axis and ro...

  • Page 1083

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1065 -10.4.9 Designation Direction Tool Length CompensationOverviewIn a five-axis machine tool having three basic axes and two rotationaxes for...

  • Page 1084

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1066 -NOTE1 The format of specified-direction tool lengthcompensation is the same as that for three-dimensional tool compensation. When usingspecified-direction tool length...

  • Page 1085

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1067 -- Operation in the specified-direction tool length compensation mode(1) Movement is made on all five axes simultaneously to the position(...

  • Page 1086

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1068 -- Specification of the magnitude of a compensation vectorBy setting parameter No. 6011, the magnitude of a compensationvector can be specified.SIlXx+=SJlYy+=SKlZz+=whe...

  • Page 1087

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1069 -- Example of machine configuration and expression for rotation axis calculation(1) When the rotation axes are the A- and C-axes, and the ...

  • Page 1088

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1070 -(3) When the rotation axes are the A- and B-axes, and the tool axis isthe X-axisWorkpieceBAZYXABIKJbKJa2211tantan+=−=−−(4) When the rotation axes are the A- and ...

  • Page 1089

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1071 -(5) When the rotation axes are the A- and B-axes, and the tool axis isthe Z-axis (master axis: A-axis)BAZXYWorkpieceAB2211tantanKJIbKJa+...

  • Page 1090

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1072 -- Relationships with other compensation functions(1) Tool length compensationTool length compensation is applied to a path resulting fromspecified-direction tool lengt...

  • Page 1091

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1073 -1029Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Valid data range]0 -...

  • Page 1092

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1074 -7514Tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 - 3Enter the tool axis direction when the two rotation axes are set at 0degree....

  • Page 1093

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1075 -10.4.10 Tool Center Point ControlOverviewOn a five-axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool, toollength compensation can be...

  • Page 1094

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1076 -Format- Specifying tool center point control (type 1)G43.4 H_ ;H : Offset number- Specifying tool center point control (type 2)G43.5 I_ J_ K_ H_ Q_ ;I,J,K : Tool axis ...

  • Page 1095

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1077 -Explanation- Specification of tool center point controlThe tool compensation vector changes in the following cases:Type 1 : The offset va...

  • Page 1096

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1078 -- Programmed pointIn programming, the position of the tool tip center is specified.Ball-end millProgrammed pathTool tip centerFlat-end millProgrammed pathTool tip cent...

  • Page 1097

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1079 -- Positioning (G00)NOTE1 Set the following parameters:(1) Bit 4 (LRP) of parameter No.1400 = 1: Lineartype rapid traverse(2) Bit 5 (FRP)...

  • Page 1098

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1080 -- Tool offset by tool numberWhen the tool offset by tool number is used, the tool lengthcompensation amount corresponding to a tool number (T code) is usedfor tool cen...

  • Page 1099

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1081 -- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolationWhen using tool center point control, also use look-aheadacceleration/decelera...

  • Page 1100

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1082 -- Functions resulting in the same operation as tool length compensation along thetool axis- Functions resulting in the same operation as tool length compensation in as...

  • Page 1101

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1083 -ParametersThe parameters used are the same as those for tool length compensationalong the tool axis and tool length compensation in a spe...

  • Page 1102

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1084 -10.4.11 Control Point Compensation of Tool Length CompensationAlong Tool AxisNormally, the control point of tool length compensation along the toolaxis is the point of...

  • Page 1103

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1085 -According to the machine type, set the values listed in the followingtable:Table 10.4.11 (a) Setting the Tool Holder Offset and Rotation...

  • Page 1104

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1086 -- Spindle center compensationCompensation of the spindle center is performed.The amount of spindle center compensation is set in parameter No.7520. Since parameter No...

  • Page 1105

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1087 -Shifting the control pointConventionally, the center of a rotation axis was used as the controlpoint. The control point can now be shift...

  • Page 1106

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1088 -- Equation for each machine typeVx, Vy, Vz :Tool length compensation vectorA, B, C:Absolute coordinates of A-, B-, and C-axesTo:Tool offset valueHo:Tool holder offset ...

  • Page 1107

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1089 -- Tool center point controlControl point compensation of tool length compensation along the toolaxis is also enabled for tool center poin...

  • Page 1108

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1090 -7719Rotation center compensation vector for head 2 in parallel axis control andtwin-table control[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real number axis[Unit of data]mm...

  • Page 1109

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1091 -7746Shift vector of tool length compensation along tool axis for head 2 in parallelaxis control and twin-table control[Input type]Paramet...

  • Page 1110

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1092 -10.4.12 Grinding Wheel Wear CompensationOn a specified compensation plane, a compensation vector is createdon an extension of a straight line starting from a specified...

  • Page 1111

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1093 -Description- Grinding wheel wear compensation (start of grinding wheel wear compensation)Up to three compensation center positions can be...

  • Page 1112

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1094 -- Canceling grinding wheel wear compensationWhen G40 and D0 are specified at the same time, the compensationvector is canceled, movement due to the cancellation takes ...

  • Page 1113

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1095 -- Compensation vectorA compensation vector is created only on the plane (compensationplane) of the axes (compensation axes) set in parame...

  • Page 1114

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1096 -- Compensation plane and plane selection by G17/G18/G19Creation of a compensation vector is not related to plane selection byG17/G18/G19.For example, while circular in...

  • Page 1115

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1097 -- Circular interpolation/helical interpolationWhen circular interpolation (G02/G03) is specified in grinding wheelwear compensation mode,...

  • Page 1116

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1098 -- Available compensation functionsThe commands listed below can be used in grinding wheel wearcompensation mode. In these command modes, grinding wheel wearcompensati...

  • Page 1117

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1099 -- Relation with compensation functionsThe commands listed below cannot be used in grinding wheel wearcompensation function mode. Before ...

  • Page 1118

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1100 -Parameters6050First axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel wearcompensation6051Second axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel we...

  • Page 1119

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1101 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06008WCD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3WCDWCDWCDWCDSpecify the direction of the compensa...

  • Page 1120

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1102 -Alarms and messagesNo.MessageDescriptionPS0618ILLEGAL P-DATA (WHEEL WEARCOMPENSATION)The P data for selecting the compensation center ingrinding wheel wear compensatio...

  • Page 1121

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1103 -10.4.13 Cutter Compensation for Rotary TableFor machines having a rotary table, such as that shown in the figurebelow, cutter compensatio...

  • Page 1122

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1104 -Description- Cutter compensationThe cutter compensation for Rotary table basically performs operationsin conformance with cutter compensation. The operations differe...

  • Page 1123

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1105 -Example- Parameter specification exampleOn the machine shown in Fig.10.4.13 (a) parameters must be specifiedas follows:The axis numbers ...

  • Page 1124

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1106 -3P conversion matrixúúúûùêêêëé−úúúûùêêêëé−=333333333cos0sin010sin0coscossin0sincos0001bbbbaaaaM(3) Calculation of three points '1P, '2P, '3P us...

  • Page 1125

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1107 -Parameters6140Axis number of linear axis 1 in the cutter compensation for Rotary table6141Axis number of linear axis 2 in the cutter comp...

  • Page 1126

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1108 -6143Axis number of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary table(first set)6144Axis number of the linear axis corresponding to the rotation axis in the...

  • Page 1127

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1109 -6150Reference angle of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotarytable (first set)6151Reference angle of the rotation axis i...

  • Page 1128

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1110 -Reference itemFANUC Series15i/150i-MBOPERATOR’SMANUAL(PROGRAMMING)(B-63784EN)II.14.3CUTTERCOMPENSATION C

  • Page 1129

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1111 -10.4.14 Tool Center Point Control for 5-axis MachiningOverviewThere are three different types of five-axis machines. They are <1> ...

  • Page 1130

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1112 -X’Y’Z’BAX’Y’Z’Table rotation type machineTool center point pathY’X’Z’Fig.10.4.14 (b)

  • Page 1131

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1113 -As the table rotates, the position and orientation of a workpiece fixedon the table change. However, programmed positions are specified ...

  • Page 1132

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1114 -<1> Tool rotationtype machineXCBZYBCXZYBYXZC<2> Table rotationtype machine<3> Mixed typemachineFig.10.4.14 (d)This function can be used also when the...

  • Page 1133

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1115 -Format - Tool center control commandFormatG43.4 H ; Starts tool center point control (TYPE1)G49 ; Cancels tool center point c...

  • Page 1134

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1116 -Programming coordinate systemIssuing G43.4 makes the CNC use the current workpiece coordinatesystem as its programming coordinate system (fixed on the table).The progr...

  • Page 1135

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1117 -Operation descriptions - Tool center point control commandWhen tool center point control is in use, a move command is issued inthe progra...

  • Page 1136

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1118 - - Current position display when tool center point control is in useFor a machine coordinate system for which tool center control is in use,the position of the control...

  • Page 1137

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1119 -About parameters(1) About the machine configurationWhat machine configuration to select as a target of parameter setting isimportant.Foll...

  • Page 1138

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1120 - - If table rotation axes do not crossExplained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation axes do notcross.In the mechanism shown in the following example, the ...

  • Page 1139

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1121 - - If the first rotary axis of the tool does not cross the tool axisExplained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindlerotatio...

  • Page 1140

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1122 -(2) Examples of setting parametersMany parameters are related to this function.So, using some examples as references would be convenient in settingparameters for the t...

  • Page 1141

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1123 -Parameter No.616121Mechanical unit type61625(B)Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis61632(Y)Axis direction for the first rotar...

  • Page 1142

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1124 -<2> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machineThis is an example of setting parameters for the table rotation typemachine shown below.Rotary...

  • Page 1143

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1125 -Parameter No.616112Mechanical unit type61624(A)Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis61631(X)Axis direction for the first rotar...

  • Page 1144

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1126 -(3) ParametersThe parameters for this function are as follows:6161Type of a mechanical unit[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 21Specif...

  • Page 1145

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1127 -6162Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to Number of control...

  • Page 1146

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1128 -6166Rotation angle when the first rotary axis is a hypothetical axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]Degree[Minimum unit of data] Depend...

  • Page 1147

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1129 -6171Rotation angle when the second rotary axis is a hypothetical axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]Degr...

  • Page 1148

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1130 -6178Tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 3Specify the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system whenthe ro...

  • Page 1149

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1131 -6179Angle when the tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA)6180Angle when the tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB...

  • Page 1150

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1132 -6184Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of thetable (X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6185Intersection offset vector between the fir...

  • Page 1151

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1133 -6190Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of thetool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6191Inters...

  • Page 1152

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1134 -6193Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool(X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6194Intersection offset vector between the firs...

  • Page 1153

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1135 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07540SVCSBP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit# 4SBPSpecify a method for shifting a controlled point as follows:0:Au...

  • Page 1154

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1136 -7745Shift vector for tool length compensation in the tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum...

  • Page 1155

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1137 -7548Tool holder offset value[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Valid data range]mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Dep...

  • Page 1156

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1138 -10.4.15 Three-dimensional Cutter Compensation for Rotary TableOverviewThis function allows three-dimensional cutter compensation to beperformed on a 5-axis machine hav...

  • Page 1157

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1139 -Example- ParametersWhen specifying the parameters related to a machine configuration, seethe table below.For the machine shown in Fig. 1...

  • Page 1158

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1140 -- FormulasThe three-dimensional cutter compensation vector at the N2 end pointin the following program can be calculated as follows:1. Part programA part program may...

  • Page 1159

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1141 -(2) Calculation of the three points P', Q', and R' used for thecalculation of three-dimensional cutter compensationThe conversion matrix...

  • Page 1160

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1142 -2e is defined as follows. Note that TVe⊥2.úúúûùêêêëé−=−0cossin)(1022BBRRNaROTeαwhere AR : reference angle of the tool axis (RA) (parameterNo. 6106) ...

  • Page 1161

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1143 -[]1321eeeNttt=−(5) Calculation of the coordinates P'', Q'', and R'' of P', Q', and R'in coordinate system C2P’’ = N P’Q’’ = N...

  • Page 1162

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1144 -6143Axis number of the rotation axis in cutter compensation for rotary table andin three-dimensional cutter compensation for rotary table (first set)6144Axis number of...

  • Page 1163

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1145 -6150Reference angle of the rotation axis in cutter compensation for rotary tableand in three-dimensional cutter compensation for rotary t...

  • Page 1164

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1146 -- Parameters related to tool rotation axes6080Rotation axis used to execute three-dimensional cutter compensation (firstset)6081Linear axis 1 used to execute three-dim...

  • Page 1165

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1147 -6085Rotation axis used to execute three-dimensional cutter compensation(second set)6086Linear axis 1 used to execute three-dimensional cu...

  • Page 1166

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1148 --Set the relationship between the rotation axis and the rotation plane.-The relationship may be set for each of two sets. This enables setup of amachine controlled wi...

  • Page 1167

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1149 -B) If the components of the direction vector of the rotation axis are in twodirections (type B)This is a case in which the rotation axis ...

  • Page 1168

    10.TOOL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1150 -6104Reference angle of rotation axis used to execute three-dimensional cuttercompensation (first set)6105Reference angle of rotation axis used to execute three-dimensi...

  • Page 1169

    B-63783EN-1/01 10.TOOL FUNCTION- 1151 -Linear axis 2Linear axis 1Linear axis 3If the tool axis is in the direction of linear axis 3RA = 0.0RB = 0.0Linear axis 2Linear axis 1Lin...

  • Page 1170

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1152 -11 PROGRAM COMMAND

  • Page 1171

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1153 -11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATORTYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMINGGeneralNumerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal pointc...

  • Page 1172

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1154 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0007ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINTA decimal point (.) was specified at an address where nodecimal point may be specified, or two decimal...

  • Page 1173

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1155 -11.2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONGeneralA program consists of the following components:Table. 11.2 Program componentsComponentsDescriptionsTape startSymbol indica...

  • Page 1174

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1156 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02200NM9NPE[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3NPENPENPENPEWhile a program is loaded, M02, M30, or M99 is:0: Assumed to be a p...

  • Page 1175

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1157 -2431M code to execute external device subprogram calls[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 99999999Set the M code to execute ext...

  • Page 1176

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1158 -11.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSIONGeneralEither inch or metric input can be selected by G code.SignalInch input signal INCH<F001#3>[Classification]Output signal[Function]This...

  • Page 1177

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1159 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01006ROPROSROT[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]BitaxisNOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be off turned off thenback o...

  • Page 1178

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1160 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02400G70F41[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1F41F41F41F41If the feed per minute of F code (G94 mode) is entered in metric wi...

  • Page 1179

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1161 -11.4 DIAMETER SPECIFICATION AND RADIUS SPECIFICATIONIf the CNC is programmed to control a lathe, the dimension of theworkpiece, which generally has a round ...

  • Page 1180

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1162 -11.5 CUSTOM MACRO11.5.1 Custom MacroGeneralAlthough subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, thecustom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic...

  • Page 1181

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1163 -Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be made easily.Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programmed andregistered, the CNC can...

  • Page 1182

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1164 -Custom Macro Output SignalUO000 to UO031<F048 to F051>, UO000 to UO031<F052 to F055>UO200 to UO231<F056 to F059>, UO300 to UO331<F060 to F063>[Classif...

  • Page 1183

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1165 -Signal addressSignal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G045CCTG048UI007UI006UI005UI004UI003UI002UI001UI000G049UI015UI014UI013UI012UI011UI010UI009UI008G050UI023UI022UI0...

  • Page 1184

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1166 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F048UO007UO006UO005UO004UO003UO002UO001UO000F049UO015UO014UO013UO012UO011UO010UO009UO008F050UO023UO022UO021UO020UO019UO018UO017UO016F051UO031UO030UO029UO028UO...

  • Page 1185

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1167 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00010SBMSB8SB7[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3SB7SB7SB7SB7Specifies whether to stop after each bl...

  • Page 1186

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1168 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1ND8ND8ND8ND8Specifies whether to display the program being executed on the screen forprograms O8000 to O8999.0: Display program being executed.1: ...

  • Page 1187

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1169 - # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2BCSBCSBCSBCSSpecifies whether to call subprograms with the second auxiliary functioncodes.0: Do not call with the second auxilia...

  • Page 1188

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1170 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07002DPG[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5DPGDPGDPGDPGSpecifies whether to allow G codes with a decimal point to be called.0...

  • Page 1189

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1171 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07010[7[6[5[4[3[2[1[07011]7]6]5]4]3]2]1]07012#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07013*7*6*5*4*3*2*1*07014=7=6=5=4=3=2=1=07015?7?6?5?4?3?2?1?07016@7@6@5@4@3@2@1@0...

  • Page 1190

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1172 -7036Start number of common variables to be protected among the commonvariables (#500 to #999)7037End number of common variables to be protected among the commonvariables (#50...

  • Page 1191

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1173 -7050G code used to call the custom macro of program number 90107051G code used to call the custom macro of program number 90117052G code used to call the cu...

  • Page 1192

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1174 -7060G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of programnumber 90407061G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of programnumber 90417062G co...

  • Page 1193

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1175 -7071M code used to call the subprogram of program number 90017072M code used to call the subprogram of program number 90027073M code used to call the subpro...

  • Page 1194

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1176 -7080M code used to call the custom macro of program number 90207081M code used to call the custom macro of program number 90217082M code used to call the custom macro of prog...

  • Page 1195

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1177 -7090Start G code used to call a custom macro7091Start program number of a custom macro called by G code7092Number of G codes used to call custom macros[Inpu...

  • Page 1196

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1178 -7093Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro7094Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal point7095Number of G codes with a ...

  • Page 1197

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1179 -7096Start M code used to call a subprogram7097Start program number of a subprogram called by M code7098Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of...

  • Page 1198

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1180 -7099Start M code used to call a custom macro7100Start program number of a custom macro called by M code7101Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macr...

  • Page 1199

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1181 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07710CTM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4CTMCTMCTMCTMSpecifies the count condition for cumulative cutting...

  • Page 1200

    11. PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1182 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0090DUPLICATE NC,MACROSTATEMENTAn NC statement and macro statement were specified inthe same block.PS0091DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORDMore t...

  • Page 1201

    B-63783EN-1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND- 1183 -NumberMessageContentsPS0122TOO MANY MACRO NESTINGToo many macro calls were nested in a custom macro. Thenesting level is 5.PS0123MISSING END STATEMENTThe EN...

  • Page 1202

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1184 -11.5.2 Interruption Type Custom MacroGeneralWhen a program is being executed, another program can be called byinputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This fun...

  • Page 1203

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1185 -Additional functions for Interruption type custom macro -Function that makes an interrupt custom macro valid when thepower is turned on (if bit 2 of param...

  • Page 1204

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1186 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1MSBMSBMSBMSBSpecifies whether local variables used in the interrupt program are thesame as those in the main program.0: Local variables are differ...

  • Page 1205

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1187 -#3 MIM#3 MIM#3 MIM#3 MIM When control returns from the last M99 in an interrupt custom macroprogram to the original program, the modal informat...

  • Page 1206

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1188 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0101ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT.An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macrointerrupt containing a move instruction could not b...

  • Page 1207

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1189 -11.6 CANNED CYCLE SPINDLE CONTROLGeneralCanned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.With a canned cycle, a frequently-used machining ...

  • Page 1208

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1190 -- Basic transmission procedureThe following four functions require spindle control:Table. 11.6 (b) Dedicated Signals for Spindle ControlFunctionInput signalOutput signalSpin...

  • Page 1209

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1191 -Using the FIN signal instead of the FFIN signalWhen bit 4 (FIN) of parameter No. 6201 is set to 1, completion signalFIN, normally used for ordinary auxiliar...

  • Page 1210

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1192 -- Canned cycle I (G86 : Boring cycle)X,YZSSPFMFFFINSpindlerotationCWStopCW-R-Z+Z+RX,Y- Canned cycle I (G88 : Boring cycle)This cycle is the same as the G86 cycle except that ...

  • Page 1211

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1193 -- Sending M05 when rotating the spindle in the reverse directionWhen the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction (from M03 to M04or vice versa), whether...

  • Page 1212

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1194 -- Canned cycle II (G87 : Back boring cycle)X,YZDENM codeMFFIN-R+ZInitial pointX,YM03M05M19ShiftM05M19Reverse shiftM03ShiftReverse shift- Canned cycle II (G76 : Fine boring cy...

  • Page 1213

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1195 -Canned cycle auxiliary signal read signal FMF<F008#5>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Enables read of the spindle stop command signal and spindl...

  • Page 1214

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1196 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1DWLDWLDWLDWLSpecifies whether a P-based dwell command in a tapping canned cycle isvalid.0: Not valid.1: Valid. # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2SIJSIJSI...

  • Page 1215

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1197 - # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1NM5NM5NM5NM5Specifies whether to output M05 when the direction of rotation of thespindle is changed from forward (M03) to revers...

  • Page 1216

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1198 -6211Clearance in canned cycle G83[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (input unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the refere...

  • Page 1217

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1199 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0196ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTEDAn illegal axis was specified for drilling in a canned cycle fordrilling.If the ze...

  • Page 1218

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1200 -11.7 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTIONGeneralUpon completion of positioning in each block in the program, anexternal operation function signal can be output to allow the machine toper...

  • Page 1219

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1201 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F008EFParameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06200EXC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5EXCSpecifies whether G81 is used to spec...

  • Page 1220

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1202 -11.8 INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTIONGeneralBy specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (onerotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining cent...

  • Page 1221

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1203 -This completes the sequence.The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.B command (independent)B axis servo on for position controlB...

  • Page 1222

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1204 -The figure below shows the timing chart for type-A manual referenceposition return of the B axis.B axis manual feed selection signal +JαB axis position control servo ONB axi...

  • Page 1223

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1205 -- Absolute/incremental programmingOne of the following indexing positions is used, depending on bit 3(G90) of parameter No. 7602:0: Value according to an a...

  • Page 1224

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1206 -- ResetIf a reset is performed in the clamp or unclamp completion wait state,the clamp or unclamp signal is cleared, and the CNC exits from thecompletion wait state.- Index t...

  • Page 1225

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1207 -SignalB axis clamp signalBCLP<F007#1>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutchor sh...

  • Page 1226

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1208 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07602DDPINCG90RELTYB[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0TYBTYBTYBTYBSpecifies whether the operation sequence of the i...

  • Page 1227

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1209 -7632M code used to specify the negative-direction rotation of an index tableindexing axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - ...

  • Page 1228

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1210 -Caution CAUTION1 While the index table is being positioned, inputsignals that reset the CNC, such as emergency stop,feed hold, and interlock are functional.If a stop at an an...

  • Page 1229

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1211 -11.9 MULTIPLE ROTARY CONTROL AXIS FUNCTIONGeneralA rotary axis is specified in the ROT bit (bit 1 of parameter 1008).When incremental programming is specifi...

  • Page 1230

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1212 - # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4RELRELRELRELSpecifies whether the current position of rotary control axes in therelative coordinate system is displayed with the value rounded off...

  • Page 1231

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1213 -11.10 SCALINGGeneralA programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).Two types of scaling are supported. One type applies the same rate o...

  • Page 1232

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1214 -- Scaling along each axis at a different rate of magnificationSet bit 4 (XSC) of parameter No. 7611 to 1. If scaling magnificationrates I, J, and K are not specified, the ma...

  • Page 1233

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1215 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06400SCR[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1SCRSpecifies the unit of magnification used for scaling (G51).0:0.000011:0.0...

  • Page 1234

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1216 -11.11 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68,G69)GeneralA programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomespossible, for example, to modify a program using a rotat...

  • Page 1235

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1217 -- specify angular displacement (R_)Bit 0 of parameter 6400 selects whether the specified angulardisplacement is always considered an absolute value...

  • Page 1236

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1218 -11.12 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSIONGeneralCoordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center ofrotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and an...

  • Page 1237

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1219 -X, Y ,Z:Coordinate system before conversion(workpiece coordinate system)X', Y' ,Z' :Coordinate system after conversion(program coordinate system)ZX...

  • Page 1238

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1220 -Three-dimensional coordinate conversion manual interrupt switch signal NOT3DM<G157#7>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Specifies whether to perform three-dimensiona...

  • Page 1239

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1221 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01200DSC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 5 # 5 # 5 # 5DSCDSCDSCDSCSpecifies the type of coordinates ...

  • Page 1240

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1222 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01404D3E[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0D3ED3ED3ED3ESpecifies which external deceleration signal is effective during cutti...

  • Page 1241

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1223 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02204DAK[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2DAKDAKDAKDAKSpecifies whether to display coordinates in...

  • Page 1242

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1224 - # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4D3RD3RD3RD3RSpecifies how the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode iscanceled.0: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is cance...

  • Page 1243

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1225 -Alarm And messageNumberMessageContentsPS0625TOO MANY G68 NESTING3-dimensional coordinate conversion was specified morethan twice.Cancel 3-dimension...

  • Page 1244

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1226 -11.12.1 Three-dimensional Coordinate Conversion and Parallel AxisControlOverviewIf three-dimensional coordinate conversion is to be performed on amachine operating with paral...

  • Page 1245

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1227 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01016PL8PL7PL6PL5PL4PL3PL2PL1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis #n #n #n #n PLmPLmPL...

  • Page 1246

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1228 -11.13 AXIS INTERCHANGEGeneralMachine axes along which actual movement is made by the X, Y, and Zcommands specified in memory operation, DNC operation, and MDIoperation are ch...

  • Page 1247

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1229 -- Specifying axis interchange(1) Specification with the setting dataSet the desired axis interchange number (0 to 5) for the settingdata.(2) Speci...

  • Page 1248

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1230 -SignalAxis switch signalsAXC4<G41#2>, AXC2<G41#1>, AXC1<G41#0>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Post an axis switch number to the control unit.[Operatio...

  • Page 1249

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1231 -1049Axis switching number[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 5Six axis switching combinations are available. To choos...

  • Page 1250

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1232 -NoteNOTE1 If the same program is used with and without axisinterchange, the amount of travel and the directionassumed with axis interchange differ from thoseassumed without a...

  • Page 1251

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1233 -11.14 OILING SIGNAL (CANNED CYCLE)OverviewA oiling(lubrication) signal, OIL, can be issued to the PMC duringmovement from point R to point Z in hol...

  • Page 1252

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1234 -Function detailsType AThe OIL signal is set to "1" simultaneously with the start of operation 3.It is reset to "0" when the time e has elapsed. The time ...

  • Page 1253

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1235 -NOTE 1 When the OIL signal is "1", executing a reset turns theOIL signal to "0" regardless of the state of the OILFsignal. 2 Th...

  • Page 1254

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1236 -SignalsLubrication completion signalOILF<G031#2> [Classification]Input signal [Function]After lubrication for hole-making canned cycle is directed by program,this signa...

  • Page 1255

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1237 - # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7OLTOLTOLTOLTSpecifies the mode in which the OIL signal is issued.0: Type A (The OIL signal is reset to "0"...

  • Page 1256

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1238 -11.15 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGEOverviewBy a programmed command, the mirror image function can be used foreach axis.Y1006050050X60100(1)(2)(3)(4)Axis of symmetry (X=50)Axis of...

  • Page 1257

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1239 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06007NR3[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # # # # 2222NR3NR3NR3NR3If a programmable mirror image is...

  • Page 1258

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1240 -####2222 NCN NCN NCN NCN If a programmable mirror image is applied to one of the two axes selectedas the reference plane for normal direction control, G41.1 and G42...

  • Page 1259

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1241 -#1 RMR#1 RMR#1 RMR#1 RMR When a programmable mirror image is applied, the value of the rotationangle R specified with coordinate rotati...

  • Page 1260

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1242 -11.16 PLANE CONVERSION FUNCTIONOverview This function converts a machining program created on the G17 planein the right-hand Cartesian coordinate system to programs for oth...

  • Page 1261

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1243 -11.17 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMANDOverviewProgramming for creating holes and pockets in a surface tilted from thedatum plane of a workpiece would b...

  • Page 1262

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1244 -This function sets the direction normal to the cut surface as the +Z-axisdirection of the feature coordinate system. Once G53.1 is issued, thetool is kept perpendicular to th...

  • Page 1263

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1245 -This function is applicable to the following machine configurations.(See Fig.11.17(d).)<1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two too...

  • Page 1264

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1246 -Format - Feature coordinate system settingFormatG68.2 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Iαααα Jββββ Kγγγγ ;Feature coordinate system settingG69 ;Cancels the feature coordinate syste...

  • Page 1265

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1247 -Coordinate conversion in which an Euler's angle is usedCoordinate conversion by rotation is assumed to be performed aroundthe workpiece coordinate ...

  • Page 1266

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1248 -Mixed-type machine - Basic operationThis function is usable also for a mixed-type machine in which the toolhead rotates on the tool rotary axis and the table rotates on the t...

  • Page 1267

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1249 - - Feature coordinate system with the table rotated by G53.1 (tool axis directioncontrol)Let's take a mixed-type machine shown in Fig.11.17(f) as a...

  • Page 1268

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1250 - - Rotation direction of the table rotary axisLet's take a mixed type machine shown Fig.11.17(f) as an example.Setting parameter No. 6170 to 1 specifies that the rotation dir...

  • Page 1269

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1251 -Table rotation type machine - Basic operationThis function is usable also for a table rotation type machine with twotable rotary axes.The feature c...

  • Page 1270

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1252 - - Feature coordinate system with the table rotated by G53.1 (tool axis directioncontrol)Let's take a table rotation type machine shown in Fig.11.17(i) as anexample.If the ta...

  • Page 1271

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1253 -Rotary axis angleTool axis direction control (G53.1) usually generates two or morecalculation angle sets for rotary axes.The term "calculation...

  • Page 1272

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1254 -Explained below is the movement decision.A calculation angle that falls in the range of 0 degrees ≤ calculationangle < 360 degrees is referred to as a basic calculation ...

  • Page 1273

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1255 -If angle PA is (*1):The output angles are (A θ2-360×(N+1) degrees, B φ2 degrees).To put another way, the nearest θ2-360×(N+1) is employed as a...

  • Page 1274

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1256 -Let us explain the output angle by taking the tool rotation type machineas an example. In this example, the tool rotation type machine is a BCtype tool axis Z-axis machine.BC...

  • Page 1275

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1257 -<4> If the current rotary axis angles are (B 180 degrees and C 90degrees)The output angles are (B 270 degrees, C 0 degrees)Because both candi...

  • Page 1276

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1258 -About parameters(1) Examples of setting parametersMany parameters are related to this function.So, using some examples as references would be convenient in settingparameters ...

  • Page 1277

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1259 -Parameter No.616121Mechanical unit type61625(B)Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis61632(Y)Axis direction for the first rotary axis6165...

  • Page 1278

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1260 -<2> Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machineThis is an example of setting parameters for the tool rotation typemachine shown below.Rotary axis C i...

  • Page 1279

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1261 -Parameter No.61612Mechanical unit type61626(C)Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis61633(Z)Axis direction for the first rotary axis61650...

  • Page 1280

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1262 -<3> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machineThis is an example of setting parameters for the table rotation typemachine shown below.Rotary axis A...

  • Page 1281

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1263 -Parameter No.616112Mechanical unit type61624(A)Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis61631(X)Axis direction for the first rotary axis6165...

  • Page 1282

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1264 -(2) ParametersThe parameters for this function are as follows:6161Type of a mechanical unit[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 21Specify the t...

  • Page 1283

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1265 -6162Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to Number of controlled axesSp...

  • Page 1284

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1266 -6166Rotation angle when the first rotary axis is a hypothetical axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]Degree[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the...

  • Page 1285

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1267 -6171Rotation angle when the second rotary axis is a hypothetical axis[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]Degree[Minimum...

  • Page 1286

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1268 -6178Tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 3Specify the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system whenthe rotary ax...

  • Page 1287

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1269 -6184Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of thetable (X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6185Intersection offset ve...

  • Page 1288

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1270 -6190Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of thetool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6191Intersection offset vector between the tool...

  • Page 1289

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1271 -6193Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool(X-axis, one of the basic three axes)6194Intersection offset vec...

  • Page 1290

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1272 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07540SVCSBP[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit# 4SBPSpecify a method for shifting a controlled point as follows:0:Automatic calculation1:Use parameter No...

  • Page 1291

    B-63783EN-1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND- 1273 -7745Shift vector for tool length compensation in the tool axis direction[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Valid data range]mm, inch (m...

  • Page 1292

    11.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63783EN-1/01- 1274 -7548Tool holder offset value[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Valid data range]mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the ap...

  • Page 1293

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1275 -12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

  • Page 1294

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1276 -12.1 DISPLEY/SET12.1.1 Clock FunctionGeneralThe function displays the current date and time on all screens.The date and time can be read by using a system variable of ...

  • Page 1295

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1277 -12.1.2 Operation/Alarm History ScreenGeneralOperations performed by the operator and any alarms that are issuedare recorded. The history can be view...

  • Page 1296

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1278 -0130Time by which to go back to delete alarms from the history[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]sec[Valid data range]0 - 255When the power to ...

  • Page 1297

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1279 -12.1.3 Alarm DisplayGeneralWhen an alarm is issued, an alarm message appears on the alarmmessage screen.SignalAlarm signalAL<F000#1>[Classifica...

  • Page 1298

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1280 -Alarm class signalOTALM<F006#3>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Used to inform the operator that an OT alarm has occurred.[Output condition]The signal goes...

  • Page 1299

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1281 -12.1.4 Operator Message DisplayGeneralWhen the display of an operator message is specified by external datainput/output or custom macro system variab...

  • Page 1300

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1282 -12.1.5 Servo Adjustment ScreenGeneralThis screen shows the parameter and status monitor required for basicservo motor adjustment for each axis.Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#...

  • Page 1301

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1283 -12.1.6 Spindle Adjustment ScreenGeneralThis screen shows the parameters and status monitor required for basicspindle adjustment.Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2...

  • Page 1302

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1284 -12.1.7 Waveform Diagnosis DisplayGeneralThe waveform diagnosis function traces data such as servo positiondeviation, torque, and machine signals and displays the chang...

  • Page 1303

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1285 -12.1.8 Self-diagnosisGeneralIf a failure occurs, it is first necessary to check whether the failure hasoriginated in the CNC, PMC, or machine, in ord...

  • Page 1304

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1286 -12.1.9 Hardware/Software System Configuration ScreenGeneralThe software and hardware configuration necessary for maintenance ofthe CNC can be displayed on the screen.T...

  • Page 1305

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1287 -12.1.10 Machined Part Count and Operation Time DisplayGeneralThe total number of machined parts, required number of parts, andnumber of machined part...

  • Page 1306

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1288 -Parameter0100Time accumulated since power-on[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]min[Valid data range]0 - 999999999Stores the time accumulated si...

  • Page 1307

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1289 -0104Time 2 accumulated during cutting[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Unit of data]min[Valid data range]0 - 999999999Stores the time accum...

  • Page 1308

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1290 -0109Number of parts required[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 999999999Sets the number of parts required. When the total number of mach...

  • Page 1309

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1291 -12.1.11 Tool Path Drawing and Background DrawingGeneral- Tool path drawingThis function draws the tool path of the current machining program.With thi...

  • Page 1310

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1292 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#04820BGG[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2BGGBGGBGGBGGSwitch between drawing functions. The operable function is:0: To...

  • Page 1311

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1293 -12.1.12 Operating Monitor ScreenGeneralThe load value of the servo motor and the spindle motor is in real timedisplayed in the bar chart. Moreover, t...

  • Page 1312

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1294 -12.1.13 Machining Time StampGeneralThis function measures and displays the machining time of a programexecuted in memory operation and stamps (inserts) the result as a...

  • Page 1313

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1295 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02400M30[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4M30M30M30M30If M30 is entered in memory operation:0: Only...

  • Page 1314

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1296 -12.1.14 Menu SwitchesGeneralWith the menu switch function, some DI signals entered with the signal(BMI interface) from the machine can be set by CNC screen operation.I...

  • Page 1315

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1297 -12.1.15 Software Operator's PanelGeneralOperations performed on the MDI panel can replace the operation of aswitch on the machine operator's panel. ...

  • Page 1316

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1298 -SignalGroupFunctionOutput signalRelated inputsignal1Mode selectionEDTOMEMOTOMDIOJOHOSOZRNO<F129#6><F129#5><F129#4><F129#3><F129#2><F12...

  • Page 1317

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1299 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F128ZRNOSPOF129EDTOMEMOTOMDIOJOHOSOF130MLKOSBKOBDT1ODRNOF131KEYOHS1DOHS1COHS1BOHS1AOF132RTOROV2O ROV1OMP4OMP2OMP1OF133*...

  • Page 1318

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1300 -The following override values can be selected by job feedrate override:*JV00 to *JV150Override (%) 15 8 7 0011111111111111110.1111111111111010...

  • Page 1319

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1301 -The following override values can be selected by spindle speedoverride:*SPV0O to *SPV7OOverride (%)70011111111101111010120111010113011100001401101011...

  • Page 1320

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1302 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07603OPUSOPSPOPKYOPATOPOVOPHDOPJGOPMD[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0OPMDOPMDOPMDOPMDSpecifies whether to ...

  • Page 1321

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1303 - # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7OPUSOPUSOPUSOPUSSpecifies whether to use the general-purpose switches on the softwareoperator's panel.0: Use.1: Do not u...

  • Page 1322

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1304 -2311Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator's panel(first character)::2388Name of the general-purpose switch 8 on the software operator's panel(e...

  • Page 1323

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1305 -Character-Code Correspondence TableNOTEA voiced sound symbol or p-sound symbol added toa Katakana is counted as a single character.Reference itemSeri...

  • Page 1324

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1306 -12.1.16 National Language DisplayOverviewThe screens can be displayed in the language specified in a parameter.Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02205SPAITAFREGERJPNENG#7#6#5#4#...

  • Page 1325

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1307 -12.1.17 Screen Clear Function and Automatic Screen Clear FunctionGeneralThe life of the LCD is reduced if the same characters are displayed inthe sam...

  • Page 1326

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1308 -- Erasing the screen by pressing the CAN key and a function keyWhen parameter 0016 is set to a non-zero value, the function forclearing the screen by pressing the CAN ...

  • Page 1327

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1309 -12.1.18 Touch PanelOverviewA pen-driven input device/touch panel, manufactured by FujitsuLimited, can be connected to the display unit of the FANUC S...

  • Page 1328

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1310 -CompensationCompensation involves the following:(1) Linearity compensation(2) Matching between the panel input position and the displayposition on the display unitComp...

  • Page 1329

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1311 -4. Pressing the [COMPENSATION] soft key displays the followingcompensation screen.5. Press the provided pen against all the compensation points (nin...

  • Page 1330

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1312 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02219TPC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0TPCSpecifies whether to display the touch panel compensation screen.0:Not displayed.1:Disp...

  • Page 1331

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1313 -12.1.19 Periodic Maintenance ScreenOverviewThe periodic maintenance screen function provides guidelines as towhen consumables such as the backup batt...

  • Page 1332

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1314 - # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6JISJISJISJISSpecifies whether to output the kanji/hiragana characters of item namesas FANUC or JIS codes on the periodic maintenance screen...

  • Page 1333

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1315 -12.1.20 Maintenance Information ScreenThe machine history of maintenance work performed by FANUCservice personnel and the machine tool builder can be...

  • Page 1334

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1316 -12.1.21 High-speed High-precision Machining Setting ScreenOverviewParameters related to high-speed high-precision machining aresummarized on this setting screen. Thre...

  • Page 1335

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1317 -1519Active parameter set number[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 2Stores the current active parameter set. Usually,...

  • Page 1336

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1318 -12.1.22 Pitch Error Compensation ScreenGeneralThe pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristicsof the machine connected to the CNC. The pitch ...

  • Page 1337

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1319 -- Moving the cursorMove the cursor to the desired pitch error compensation data.Method 1Use the PAGE PAGE page keys and cursor keys to move the cur...

  • Page 1338

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1320 -12.1.23 Power Mate CNC Manager FunctionWhen power motion series units are used as CNC additional (slave)axes, the power mate CNC manager function enables the data for ...

  • Page 1339

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1321 -- Slave state display and selection operationsThe following information related to the connected slaves (up to 8) isdisplayed at the top ...

  • Page 1340

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1322 -- Display position selectionThe current position type to be displayed is selected using soft keys:- Absolute coordinate display: Press soft key [ABSOLUTE].- Machine...

  • Page 1341

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1323 -- Parameter selection and searchTo select a desired parameter number, position the cursor to theparameter number by pressing the cursor k...

  • Page 1342

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1324 -NOTEIf a program corresponding to the selected programnumber is already in program memory, the new dataoverwrites the program. If the program is currentlyselected, ho...

  • Page 1343

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1325 -- Diagnostic data searchPressing the page keys PAGEPAGE scrolls the screen.Alternatively, diagnostic data can be searched for using the f...

  • Page 1344

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1326 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02080PPEPMNSLV[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 0SLVSpecifies whether to use multiple-slave displays (for up to fourslaves) in the p...

  • Page 1345

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1327 -2090Axis name for power mate CNC manager function slave 12091Axis name for power mate CNC manager function slave 22092Axis name for power ...

  • Page 1346

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1328 -Caution- I/O Link connectionWhen a power motion series unit is used as an I/O Link slave, the CNCassigns an I/O address to the slave. Because the data input to andou...

  • Page 1347

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1329 -12.1.24 DI/DO Monitor FunctionIf a failure occurs, or the machine halts while waiting for an externalsignal such that it appears as if a f...

  • Page 1348

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1330 -- Signal-by-signal displayA signal extending over more than one bit is displayed using a singledecimal number (one-bit signals are displayed using binary numbers (0and...

  • Page 1349

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1331 -3. Bit axis type signalThis is a one-bit axis type signal. Its start address and bit number forthe first axis are displayed as the signal...

  • Page 1350

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1332 -6. Integer spindle type signalThis is an integer type signal extending over more than one bit. Itsfirst-axis address and bit number are displayed as the signal addres...

  • Page 1351

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1333 -Example of address entry1. Address entry for bit display"G67"A page containing signals related to G67appears."67"If DI...

  • Page 1352

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1334 -12.1.25 Brightness Adjustment Screen for Monochrome Display Unitwith Graphic FunctionOverviewThis function is available only for monochrome display unit withgraphic fu...

  • Page 1353

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1335 -NOTEThe LCD brightness is lowered at low ambienttemperatures. (Particularly, the LCD screen is darkimmediately after power-up.) This is ...

  • Page 1354

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1336 -12.1.26 Fine Torque SensingOverviewThe CNC stores the disturbance torque data detected by a servo motoror spindle motor to internal memory. The following manipulation...

  • Page 1355

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1337 -NOTE1 The disturbance load torque data is represented as apercentage of the rated torque.2 If the sample data preservation function is ena...

  • Page 1356

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1338 - # 4ATLSpecifies whether to allow the abnormal load detection alarm thresholdvalue to be changed on the fine torque sensing torque graph screen asfollows:0:Do not a...

  • Page 1357

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1339 -SignalsTorque sensing command signalFTCMD<G149#0>[Classification]Input signal[Function]This signal directs that disturbance load tor...

  • Page 1358

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1340 -12.1.27 2-LCD-unit Connection FunctionDescriptionUntil now, it was only possible to display screens on a single LCD unit.By using this function, it is now possible to ...

  • Page 1359

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1341 -NOTE3 If a card is inserted into the memory card interface ofthe first LCD unit after the system is switched to thesecond LCD unit, the sy...

  • Page 1360

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1342 -Parameters#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02219MLC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 3 # 3 # 3 # 3MMMMLLLLCCCCAt power on, the 2-LCD-unit connection function selec...

  • Page 1361

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1343 -12.1.28 Changing Blinking Displays in G05.1 Q1 ModeOverviewIn G05.1 Q1 mode (acceleration/deceleration mode before look-aheadinterpolation...

  • Page 1362

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1344 -If parameter Nos. 2590 to 2596 are all reset to 0, the character string"HPCC" is displayed and made to blink on the status bar across the topof the screen. (...

  • Page 1363

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1345 -Parameters2590First character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode2591Second character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode2592Third chara...

  • Page 1364

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1346 -12.1.29 M Code Commands for Displaying Operator MessagesOverviewThe comment found in the same block as that containing the M codecommand specified as a parameter may b...

  • Page 1365

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1347 -Execution exampleIf "55" is set in parameter No. 2433 and the blockM55 (ABCDEFG);is executed, the M code number and the MF signa...

  • Page 1366

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1348 -Parameter2433M code for outputting operator message (macro message)[Input classification]Parameter input[Data type]Integer type[Valid data range]0 to 99999999Specify t...

  • Page 1367

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1349 -12.1.30 Changing the CNC Screen Title Background ColorOverviewOn a color display, each CNC screen has its title displayed on the topline o...

  • Page 1368

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1350 -12.2 EDITING12.2.1 Tape Length for Part Program StorageGeneralThe following tape lengths are supported:80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, and 5120 mAlarm and messageWARNIN...

  • Page 1369

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1351 -12.2.2 Number of Programs StoredGeneralThe following lists the number of NC programs that can be stored foreach tape length:Tape length (m...

  • Page 1370

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1352 -12.2.3 Memory Protection KeysGeneralMemory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertentlystore, change, or delete programs, offset values, parameters, sett...

  • Page 1371

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1353 -12.2.4 Program EncryptionGeneralA password can be set by setting parameter No. 2210 (PSW) andparameter No. 2211 (KEY) to lock program memo...

  • Page 1372

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1354 -Parameter2210Password (PSW)[Input type]Locked parameter[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 - 99999999Specify a password (PSW). When a value other than 0 is specifie...

  • Page 1373

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1355 -2212Minimum value for the program protection range (PMIN)2213Maximum value for the program protection range (PMAX)[Input type]Locked param...

  • Page 1374

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1356 -12.2.5 Background EditingGeneralEditing a program while another program is being executed or edited isreferred to as background editing.In background editing, program ...

  • Page 1375

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1357 -12.2.6 PlaybackGeneralWith the playback function, desired machine positions set by makingmanual movements along axes in teach-in mode can ...

  • Page 1376

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1358 -Teach-in select confirmation signalMTCHIN<F002#3>[Classification]Output signal[Function]Posts notification that teach-in mode is selected.[Output condition]This ...

  • Page 1377

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1359 -12.2.7 Automatic Sequence Number InsertionGeneralEach time a block is inserted during program creation, a sequencenumber is inserted autom...

  • Page 1378

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1360 -12.2.8 Editing a Running ProgramGeneralWhen a program running in automatic operation mode is edited, theprogram can be stopped by the feed hold or single block functio...

  • Page 1379

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1361 -12.2.9 DO Signal Output by Soft KeyOverviewA DO signal can be output by pressing a soft key. When any CNCscreen is displayed, a DO signal...

  • Page 1380

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1362 -NOTE1 When bit 1 (NAP) of parameter No. 8000 is 0, analarm causes the screen to switch to the alarmmessage screen, placing the soft keys in the alarmcancel state.If su...

  • Page 1381

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1363 -Method 2Press MDIkey several times until the custom soft keysettingscreen appears.Fig. 12.2.9 (a) Custom Soft Key Setting Screen- Settin...

  • Page 1382

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1364 -Input of half-size katakana charactersWhen the display language of the CNC is Japanese, pressing soft key[ALPHANUMERIC/KANA] switches between half-sizealphanumeric inp...

  • Page 1383

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1365 -Table for Conversion between Half-Size Katakana and Roman Characters (1)Table for Conversion between Half-Size Katakana and Roman Characte...

  • Page 1384

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1366 - In the conversion of a choked sound, double consonants (except N and M) after the choked sound. Example: "IPPAI" → ""Setting data inpu...

  • Page 1385

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1367 -- Procedures for inputting setting dataMethod 1 (when neither the file name nor file number of an input file isspecified)(1) Press soft ke...

  • Page 1386

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1368 -SignalsCustom soft key function signalsCTSF00 to CTSF79<F349 to F358>[Classification]Output signal[Function]In the soft key DO signal output function, each signa...

  • Page 1387

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1369 -12.3 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACEOverviewThe following data input/output operations can be done using thereader/punch interface.-Part program ...

  • Page 1388

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1370 -Input/output portsThe CNC has several ports for connecting input/output devices.NameReader/punch interface AReader/punch interface BReader/punch interface CInterface t...

  • Page 1389

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1371 -ParametersTransferring data (such as programs and parameters) with externalinput/output devices via an I/O device interface (RS-232C seria...

  • Page 1390

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1372 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#00000EIANCRISPCTVTVC[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0TVCTVCTVCTVCSpecifies whether to make a TV check as follows:0: Do...

  • Page 1391

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1373 -0020Interface number for a foreground input device[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 21This parameter speci...

  • Page 1392

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1374 -0023Interface number for a background output device[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]0 to 21This parameter specifies an interface number for...

  • Page 1393

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1375 -5020Device number for a reader/punch attached to JD5C on the additional-axisboard[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data ra...

  • Page 1394

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1376 -5110Specification number for a reader/punch unit corresponding to devicenumber 1[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Integer[Valid data range]1 to 8This parameter speci...

  • Page 1395

    B-63783EN-1/01 12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT- 1377 -5120Specification number for a reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 25121Number of stop bits for a reader/punch unit correspon...

  • Page 1396

    12.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63783EN-1/01- 1378 -Alarms and messagesNumberMessageContentsSR0805ILLEGAL COMMANDAn attempt was made to specify an illegal command duringI/O processing on an I/O device.SR0806DEVICE TYPE ...

  • Page 1397

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1379 -13 MEASUREMENT

  • Page 1398

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1380 -13.1 TOOL LENGTH MANUAL MEASUREMENTGeneralThe value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offsetmemory as an offset value by a soft key.Call offset value d...

  • Page 1399

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1381 -13.2 WORKPIECE ORIGIN MANUAL SETTINGGeneralBy directly entering the value of the deviation measured between theworkpiece coordinate system assumed dur...

  • Page 1400

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1382 -13.3 TOOL LENGTH/WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENTGeneralAs the functions for measuring the tool length, the following methodsare provided: method by which the tool length i...

  • Page 1401

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1383 -Tool offset number selection signals OFN0-OFN9<G028#0-#5, G030#0#1#6#7>[Classification]Input signal[Function]Selects a tool offset number.[Oper...

  • Page 1402

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1384 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#06002QNI[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 6 # 6 # 6 # 6QNIQNIQNIQNISpecifies whether, in tool length measurement, a tool o...

  • Page 1403

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1385 - # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4WMHWMHWMHWMHSpecifies whether a workpiece origin offset measurement is made for endfaces only or for both end faces and ho...

  • Page 1404

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1386 -6024Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the reference measurementsurface[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm, inch (machine unit)...

  • Page 1405

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1387 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07697WNM[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # # # # 2222WNMWNMWNMWNMAfter the manual numerical command or measuremen...

  • Page 1406

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1388 -13.4 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37)By issuing G37 the tool starts moving to the measurement position andkeeps on moving till the approach end signal from the m...

  • Page 1407

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1389 -- Changing the offset valueWhen the MDC bit (bit 0 of parameter 7300) is set to 1 (default), thedifference between the coordinate value of the positio...

  • Page 1408

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1390 -[Operation]When the signal is turned "1", the control unit works as follows:-Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specifiedand updates the ...

  • Page 1409

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1391 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07300SEBMDC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 0 # 0 # 0 # 0MDCMDCMDCMDCSpecifies whether the result of an...

  • Page 1410

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1392 -7321Deceleration position in automatic tool length measurement (value of γγγγ)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm, inch (machine unit)[Minimu...

  • Page 1411

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1393 -13.4.1 High-speed Measuring Position Reached SignalGeneralThe skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HAE1 toHAE8 : connected direct...

  • Page 1412

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1394 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#073011A81A71A61A51A41A31A21A1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit 1A1 to 1A81A1 to 1A81A1 to 1A81A1 to 1A8A high-speed measurement po...

  • Page 1413

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1395 -13.5 SKIP FUNCTION13.5.1 Skip FunctionGeneralLinear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial movefollowing the G31 command, like G01. If an...

  • Page 1414

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1396 -Origin of thecoordinatesystemSkip signal input positionPncPQPnc : Current position within the CNC when the skip signal turns on (in mm or inches)P : Distance to be me...

  • Page 1415

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1397 -NOTE4 The CNC directly reads the skip signalSKIP<X011#6> from the machine tool; the PMC nolonger requires to process the signal.5 If the skip fu...

  • Page 1416

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1398 -1428Skip function (G31) feedrate[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Real[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the i...

  • Page 1417

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1399 -Alarm and messageNumberMessageContentsPS0151CANNOT USE G31The alarm occurs in the following cases:- The G31 code cannot be specified. The G code in gr...

  • Page 1418

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1400 -13.5.2 High-speed Skip SignalGeneralThe skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 toHDI7 : connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead ...

  • Page 1419

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1401 -13.5.3 Multi-step SkipGeneralIn a block specifying G31.1 to G31.4, the multi-step skip functionstores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cance...

  • Page 1420

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1402 -[Operation]When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit functions as describedbelow.-When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31.1 to G31.4) forskip cu...

  • Page 1421

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1403 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07200SRESFNHSS[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 4 # 4 # 4 # 4HSSHSSHSSHSSSpecifies whether to use the hi...

  • Page 1422

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1404 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#072051S81S71S61S51S41S31S21S1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit 1S1 to 1S81S1 to 1S81S1 to 1S81S1 to 1S8A skip signal to be used fo...

  • Page 1423

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1405 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#072062S82S72S62S52S42S32S22S1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit 2S1 to 2S82S1 to 2S82S1 to 2S82S1 to 2S8A skip si...

  • Page 1424

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1406 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#072084S84S74S64S54S44S34S24S1[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit 4S1 to 4S84S1 to 4S84S1 to 4S84S1 to 4S8A skip signal to be used fo...

  • Page 1425

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1407 -7211Feedrate of the skip function (G31 or G31.1)7212Feedrate of the skip function (G31.2)7213Feedrate of the skip function (G31.3)7214Feedrate of the ...

  • Page 1426

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1408 -13.5.4 Torque Limit SkipGeneralWhen a move command following G31P99 (or G31P98) is executedwith the torque limit(*1) of a servo motor overridden, cutting feed canbe per...

  • Page 1427

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1409 -(1) At point A, the machine touches a measurement object thenstops. At this point, the torque limit has not yet been attained.So, a move command is o...

  • Page 1428

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1410 -- Torque limit commandIf no torque limit override value is specified with address Q in thetorque limit skip command, and no torque limit command is specifiedin the PMC ...

  • Page 1429

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1411 -- Custom macro variablesWhen a torque limit skip command is executed, the coordinates of theend point of skip operation are stored in custom macro sys...

  • Page 1430

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1412 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#07203TSE[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1 # 1 # 1 # 1TSETSETSETSESpecifies a skip position to be stored in the system va...

  • Page 1431

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1413 -1843Position deviation limit at torque limit skip[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]0 - 32...

  • Page 1432

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1414 -13.6 CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL MOVEIf you want to perform roughing or semi-finishing with a single tool,you may fine-adjust the tool length compensation ...

  • Page 1433

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1415 -- Changing the tool length compensationThis function can change the tool length compensation identified by theoffset number corresponding to an H code...

  • Page 1434

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1416 -- Changing the workpiece origin offsetThis function can change the workpiece origin offset of an individualaxis of the workpiece coordinate system corresponding to G54 ...

  • Page 1435

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1417 -- Operations specific to individual tool offset memory typesThe offset to be changed varies with what tool offset memory (A, B, orC) is used, as liste...

  • Page 1436

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1418 -- Emergency stop and SV alarmIf the servo power is switched off (for example, when the machine isbrought to an emergency stop or an SV alarm occurs), axis movementcause...

  • Page 1437

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1419 -Active offset selection signalAOFS1,AOFS2<G153#5,#6>[Classification]Input signal [Function]This signal selects the type of an offset to be chang...

  • Page 1438

    13.MEASUREMENT B-63783EN-1/01- 1420 -The following timing chart shows how the input and signals behave.Automatic operation startingsignal (STL)Active offset change modesignal (CHGAO)Active offset changings...

  • Page 1439

    B-63783EN-1/01 13.MEASUREMENT- 1421 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02214APL[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit axis # 7 # 7 # 7 # 7APLAPLAPLAPLSpecifies whether to preset the relative ...

  • Page 1440

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1422 -14 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

  • Page 1441

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1423 -14.1 PMC AXIS CONTROLGeneralThe PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of theCNC. In other words, moving the tool along axes that are notcontr...

  • Page 1442

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1424 -The names of the input/output signals related to PMC axis controlcontain lowercase letter x. An example is PMCAx. In reality, however,a signal named PMCAx does not exist. PMC...

  • Page 1443

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1425 -The figure below shows that command [1] is being executed, [2]is placed in the buffer in the CNC, and [3] has already beenspecified (the axis control block dat...

  • Page 1444

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1426 -PMCAxCNCAxExclusive OR(XOR)Buffer status in CNC00110The previous command block has been read, andthe PMC can specify another block.01101The previous command block has not yet be...

  • Page 1445

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1427 -- Diameter/radius programming for the PMC axisA parameter can be used to select which PMC axis command type(diameter or radius command) is to be used for an a...

  • Page 1446

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1428 -Signal details(1) PMC axis control signalPCAX1<G66#3>, PCAX2<G70#3>, ...[Classification]Input signal [Function]Enables PMC axis control.PCAXoo : 1 ..... The first ax...

  • Page 1447

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1429 -(2) Axis control command code signalCD1X7 - CD1X0<G385#7 - 0>, CD2X7 - CD2X0<G393#7 - 0>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Function]Specifies the op...

  • Page 1448

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1430 -Axis controlcommand(hex code)OperationSkip--feed per minute13hPerforms the same operation as "G31 G01" for the CNC.Continuous feed (exponential acceleration/decelerati...

  • Page 1449

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1431 -- Feedrate commandPMCBMICNCAxiscontrolFeedratecommandAxis controlblock datasignalFeedratecommandRotationspeed dataAxis control dataFeedratecommandskip signalPM...

  • Page 1450

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1432 -(Example)Suppose that the following commands are issued:M80 ; M function selecting a feedrate commandS200 ; Specify a rotation speed of 200 min-1. : :S300 ; Specify a rotation...

  • Page 1451

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1433 -(2) Acceleration/deceleration for a feedrate commandWhen the feedrate command function of the PMC axis controlfunction is used, linear acceleration/deceleratio...

  • Page 1452

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1434 -b.Position management in torque control modeWhether to perform follow-up in torque control mode can bespecified by bit 3 (TQF) of parameter No. 1409.When the parameter is set su...

  • Page 1453

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1435 -3) Reset signal RSTx is set to 1.4) A servo alarm is issued.5) An OT alarm is issued on an axis subjected to torquecontrol.6) An emergency stop occurred.7) A c...

  • Page 1454

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1436 -- Feed per revolutionCutting feed--Specifying feed per revolution (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 12h)requires the specification of the threading and feed-per-revolutionoptions.- Skip--feed ...

  • Page 1455

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1437 -- Correspondence between axis control commands and specified dataThe following table lists the axis control commands and correspondingcommand data:Command blo...

  • Page 1456

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1438 -(3) Feedrate specification signalFD1X15 - FD1X0 <G387#7 - G386#0>, FD2X15 - FD2X0 <G395#7 - G394#0>, ... [Classification]Input signal [Function]FDoX15 - FDoX0o : 1 ....

  • Page 1457

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1439 -[Unit of data]When bit 1 (F10) of parameter No. 1409 is set to 0Unit of dataIS-AIS-BIS-CIS-DIS-EunitMetric input10.01.00.10.010.001mm/minLinearaxisInch input 1...

  • Page 1458

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1440 -FDxX0: Controlled axis 1FDxX5: Controlled axis 6FDxX1: Controlled axis 2FDxX6: Controlled axis 7FDxX2: Controlled axis 3FDxX7: Controlled axis 8FDxX3: Controlled axis 4FDxX8: Co...

  • Page 1459

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1441 -(11)Feedrate command (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0Dh)When a feedrate command is specified, the servo motor speed isset using binary code. For forward rotation, a positi...

  • Page 1460

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1442 -(12) Torque control command (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 0Eh)The maximum speed in torque control is specified in min-1. If thereis no object for torque generation, or if the movement spee...

  • Page 1461

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1443 -(14) Continuous feed (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 16h)An axis feedrate is specified in the same way as a cutting feed-feed per minute (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 01h), but the feed...

  • Page 1462

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1444 - CAUTIONThe parameter for rapid traverse rate of each axis(parameter No. 1420) is used for clamping.NOTEIf specification by diameter is selected in parameterDIA (bit 3 of parame...

  • Page 1463

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1445 -(8) Auxiliary function (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 08h)The selection number of an auxiliary function signal used isspecified using two-digit binary code.The auxiliary fu...

  • Page 1464

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1446 -(5) Axis control command read strobe signalPMCA1<G66#7>, PMCA2<G70#7>, ... [Classification]Input signal [Function]Requests the CNC to read the PMC axis control comma...

  • Page 1465

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1447 -(8) Axis control stop signalSTP1<G66#5>, STP2<G70#5>, ... [Classification]Input signal[Function]When this signal is set to 1:(1) During movement al...

  • Page 1466

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1448 -The timing chart for the command operation is shown below.Command blocki(input)PMCAxi(input)[1][2]SBKxi(input)CNCAx(output)Execution-in-progressregisterExecutionwait buffer[1][2...

  • Page 1467

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1449 -(14) PMC axis control rapid traverse override signalROV1E<G45#0>, ROV2E<G45#1> [Classification]Input signal[Function]Overrides the feedrate set for...

  • Page 1468

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1450 -(15) Distribution end signalDEN1<F66#6>, DEN2<F70#6>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]While movement along an axis is being made by a command from thePMC, ...

  • Page 1469

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1451 -(17) External deceleration signal*+ED 1<G64#2>, *+ED2<G68#2>, ... *-ED1<G64#3>, *-ED2<G68#3>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Function]...

  • Page 1470

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1452 -(18) Feedrate command skip signalVCSKP1<G67#6>, VCSKP2<G71#6>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Function]When this signal is set to 1, the following operation is perf...

  • Page 1471

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1453 -[Operation]In actual operation, a feedrate specified in PMC axis control isoverridden by the value selected by this signal.When movement is being made along an...

  • Page 1472

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1454 -(20) PMC axis control override signal in simultaneous start modeOVA7 - OVA0<G383#7 - 0>[Classification]Input signal[Function]In simultaneous start mode, the feedrate in PM...

  • Page 1473

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1455 -(23) Separate detector disconnection alarm ignore signalNDCAL1<G67#5>, NDCAL2<G71#5>, ...[Classification]Input signal[Function]If this signal is 1 ...

  • Page 1474

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1456 -(24) PMC axis overtravel signals+EOT1<F65#6>, +EOT2<F69#6>, ...-EOT1<F65#7>, -EOT2<F69#7>, ...[Classification]Output signal[Function]If an overtravel al...

  • Page 1475

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1457 -Signal addressPMC→→→→CNCNon-axis type signals#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G045PCSKPROV2EROV1EG046FIN3XFIN2XFIN1XG383OVA7OVA6OVA5OVA4OVA3OVA2OVA1OVA0Axis-type signal...

  • Page 1476

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1458 -CNC→→→→PMCNon-axis type signals#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F046MF3XMF2XMF1XF141AF1X7AF1X6AF1X5AF1X4AF1X3AF1X2AF1X1AF1X0F142AF2X7AF2X6AF2X5AF2X4AF2X3AF2X2AF2X1AF2X0F143AF3X7AF3X6AF3X...

  • Page 1477

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1459 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01001PED[Input type]Setting input[Data type]Bit # 6PEDSpecifies whether to enable the external deceleration function inPMC axis cont...

  • Page 1478

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1460 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01404NDIPOVPRO[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 1PROSpecifies whether to enable override for rapid traverse, referenceposition return, and positionin...

  • Page 1479

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1461 - # 7NDISpecifies the behavior of PMC-based axis control when diameterprogramming is used for the PMC controlled axis, as follows:0:The actual amount of trav...

  • Page 1480

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1462 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01409JFMFR2FR1TQFRPDF10[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 1F10Specifies the unit of feedrate data specified in the Cutting feed (feedper minute), ...

  • Page 1481

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1463 - # 7JFMThis sets the command increment of feedrate data in the continuousfeed command (16H) during PMC axis control.0:The unit of feedrate data depends on t...

  • Page 1482

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1464 -[Data type]Realaxis[Unit of data]mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)[Minimum unit of data]Depend on the increment system of the applied axis[Valid data range]Refer to th...

  • Page 1483

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1465 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#01951TQC[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bitaxis # 7TQCSpecifies whether to perform torque control for the relevant axis.0:Torque contro...

  • Page 1484

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1466 - # 7SKESpecifies which skip signal is to be used for PMC axis control asfollows:0:SKIP1 (same skip signal as that for the CNC)1:PCSKP (signal specific to PMC axis control)#7#...

  • Page 1485

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1467 -7768Torque control cancellation limit[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integeraxis[Unit of data]detection unit[Valid data range]1 - 32767Set a cancellation...

  • Page 1486

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1468 -Warning WARNING1 If the reference position return function is disabled(parameter ZRN (bit 0 of parameter No. 1005) = 1)and no manual reference position return has beenperformed ...

  • Page 1487

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1469 -Caution CAUTION1 Movements and operations under PMC axis control are notaffected by the CNC states such as mode selection, CNCreset, feed hold, and single-bloc...

  • Page 1488

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1470 -14.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUTGeneralData can be input and output between CNC and PMC, using signalssuch as the following:External data inputExternal data outputInput signalOutput sig...

  • Page 1489

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1471 -- Basic procedure for external data outputThe basic external data output procedure is described below:1.PMC sets address EIA0 to EIA7 indicating the type of da...

  • Page 1490

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1472 -These steps are shown in the timing chart in the figure below.External data input for a data output request and external data output donot necessarily occur in succession. If t...

  • Page 1491

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1473 -2Sequence number[Input]A sequence number can be specified to search for the block to beexecuted in memory command mode. A sequence number within therange of 1...

  • Page 1492

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1474 -4Workpiece origin offset[Input]A controlled axis number and a coordinate system number can bespecified to change the workpiece origin offset. The specification ofwhether a valu...

  • Page 1493

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1475 -[Output]A controlled axis number and a coordinate system number can bespecified to output the current workpiece origin offset. Upon an outputrequest, a contro...

  • Page 1494

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1476 -7Operator message[Input]A message number can be input to register an external operatormessage with the CNC. Then, message text can be sent to display themessage on the operator...

  • Page 1495

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1477 -9Tool offset with a tool number (tool number)[Input]To input and output a pot number and tool offset value, the target tooldata must be specified using the too...

  • Page 1496

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1478 -1Program number#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ERDRQ(G32#6)0/1EIA(G33)/ EOA(F33)00000000(G34/F34)--------(G35/F35)--------EID/EOD(G36/F36)(G37/F37)Program number(G38/F38)(1 to 99999999)(G39/F...

  • Page 1497

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1479 -4Work origin offset valueWhen G54 to G59#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ERDRQ(G32#6)0/1EIA(G33)/ EOA(F33)0010Axis number(0,1,2,3,4...)(G34/F34)a/i-------(G35/F35)Specify whe...

  • Page 1498

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1480 -7Operator message#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ERDRQ(G32#6)0EIA(G33)/ EOA(F33)0100010c/s(G34/F34)--------(G35/F35)--------EID/EOD(G36/F36)(G37/F37)Operator message number(G38/F38)(0 to 4095...

  • Page 1499

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1481 -01 ...Output of the number of the tool for which compensation iscurrently enabled.10 ... Output of the selected tool number10Tool offset with a tool number (po...

  • Page 1500

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1482 -12Nmuber of required parts#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0ERDRQ(G32#6)0/1EIA(G33)/ EOA(F33)01100001(G34/F34)--------(G35/F35)01100000EID/EOD(G36/F36)(G37/F37)Nmuber of required parts(G38/F38)...

  • Page 1501

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1483 -Read end signal for external data input EIREND<F032#5>[Classification]Output signal[Function]This signal reports that the CNC has read external data inp...

  • Page 1502

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1484 -External search end signal ESEND<F007#5>[Classification]Output signal[Function]This signal reports that the program number search or sequence searchspecified by external d...

  • Page 1503

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1485 -Parameter#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#02217NOM[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Bit # 2 # 2 # 2 # 2NOMNOMNOMNOMSpecifies whether to automatically switch to t...

  • Page 1504

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1486 -14.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCHGeneralSeveral machining programs can be stored in program memory and canbe started using external signals.When, in a reset state, automatic...

  • Page 1505

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1487 -Workpiece number 00 is used for special designation "no search".Thus, a workpiece number ranges from 01 to 31. The correspondencebetween the workpiec...

  • Page 1506

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1488 -Signal address#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G019WN16WN8WN4WN2WN1G140EWN7EWN6EWN5EWN4EWN3EWN2EWN1EWN0G141EWN15 EWN14 EWN13 EWN12 EWN11 EWN10EWN9EWN8G142EWN23 EWN22 EWN21 EWN20 EWN19 EWN18 EWN1...

  • Page 1507

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1489 -2049Correspondence between a workpiece number and a program number in anexternal workpiece number search (PN)[Input type]Parameter input[Data type]Integer[Vali...

  • Page 1508

    14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63783EN-1/01- 1490 -14.4 KEY INPUT FROM PMCGeneralBy changing the input signals from the PMC to the CNC from "0" to"1," operations equivalent to those achieved by using the keys...

  • Page 1509

    B-63783EN-1/01 14.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION- 1491 -NoteNOTE1 By changing the signal for operating a soft key from "0" to "1,"the soft key can be operated from the PMC. Note, however,the fol...

  • Page 1510

  • Page 1511

    APPENDIX

  • Page 1512

  • Page 1513

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1495 -A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

  • Page 1514

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1496 -A.1 ADDRESS LISTA.1.1 PMC to NC#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G000ERSRRW*SP*ESPSKIP1UINT*CSL*ITG001SKIP4SKIP3SKIP2AE3AE2AE1*BSL*AITG002ZRNBRNSRNMOVLTCHING003AGJEDTMEMTDJHSG004MLKDLKABSOVCSB...

  • Page 1515

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1497 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G025RISGNARI12ARI11ARI10ARI9ARI8AG026GS4AGS2AGS1A *SECLPA*SEUCLA DVALSPSTPAG027G028GOQSM WOQSMOFN5OFN4OFN3OFN2OFN1OFN0G029RVSSPCASPBASPAAG030OFN7OFN6OFN9OFN8G031M3ROILF...

  • Page 1516

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1498 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G050UI023UI022UI021UI020UI019UI018UI017UI016G051UI031UI030UI029UI028UI027UI026UI025UI024G052UI107UI106UI105UI104UI103UI102UI101UI100G053UI115UI114UI113UI112UI...

  • Page 1517

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1499 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G075SCNTR3 VCSKP3 NDCAL3 *ACTF3DVAL3RAST3G076DTCH4*SVF4*DEC4*IT4*-ED4*+ED4*-L4*+L4G077*CL4PK4MLK4MI4-J4+J4G078PMCA4RST4STP4SBK4PCAX4SYNC4-MIT4+MIT4G079SCNTR4 VCSKP4 NDC...

  • Page 1518

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1500 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G100DTCH10 *SVF10 *DEC10*IT10*-ED10*+ED10*-L10*+L10G101*CL10PK10MLK10MI10-J10+J10G102PMCA10 RST10STP10SBK10 PCAX10 SYNC10 -MIT10+MIT10G103SCNTR10 VCSKP10 NDCA...

  • Page 1519

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1501 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G125*CL16PK16MLK16MI16-J16+J16G126PMCA16 RST16STP16SBK16 PCAX16 SYNC16 -MIT16+MIT16G127SCNTR16 VCSKP16 NDCAL16*ACTF16 DVAL16 RAST16G128G129G130G131G132G133G134G135G136G...

  • Page 1520

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1502 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G150G151G152G153AOFS2AOFS1 CHGAOG154*TLV7*TLV6*TLV5*TLV4*TLV3*TLV2*TLV1*TLV0G155*TLV9*TLV8G156TLHD2B TLHD2A TLHD1B TLHD1A CNGTLRNDHRGHTH ALNGHG157NOT3DM BCANG...

  • Page 1521

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1503 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G175G176G177HCREQ HCABTG178THD07THD06THD05THD04THD03THD02THD01THD00G179THD15THD14THD13THD12THD11THD10THD09THD08G180G181G182G183G184G185G186G187G188G189G190G191G192G193G...

  • Page 1522

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1504 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G200G201G202G203G204G205G206G207G208RI7CRI6CRI5CRI4CRI3CRI2CRI1CRI0CG209RISGNCRI12CRI11CRI10CRI9CRI8CG210RCHCRSLCINTGCSOCNC MCFNC SPSLC*ESPCARSTCG211MRDYC ORC...

  • Page 1523

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1505 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G225G226RCHARSLAINTGASOCNA MCFNA SPSLA*ESPAARSTAG227MRDYA ORCMASFRASRVACTH1ACTH2ATLMHATLMLAG228MPOFASLVAMORCMAG229RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAAINDXAG23...

  • Page 1524

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1506 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G250PMCA19 RST19STP19SBK19 PCAX19 SYNC19 -MIT19+MIT19G251SCNTR19 VCSKP19 NDCAL19*ACTF19 DVAL19 RAST19G252DTCH20 *SVF20 *DEC20*IT20*-ED20*+ED20*-L20*+L20G253PK...

  • Page 1525

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1507 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G275SPCBSPBBSPABG276SPCCSPBCSPACG277SPCDSPBDSPADG278G279G280G281G282G283G284G285G286G287G288G289G290G291G292MSBK17*NZ17-LM17+LM17-EXL17 +EXL17G293CD17X7 CD17X6 CD17X5 C...

  • Page 1526

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1508 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G300MSBK18*NZ18-LM18+LM18-EXL18 +EXL18G301CD18X7 CD18X6 CD18X5 CD18X4 CD18X3 CD18X2 CD18X1 CD18X0G302FD18X7 FD18X6 FD18X5 FD18X4 FD18X3 FD18X2 FD18X1 FD18X0G3...

  • Page 1527

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1509 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G325CD21X7 CD21X6 CD21X5 CD21X4 CD21X3 CD21X2 CD21X1 CD21X0G326FD21X7 FD21X6 FD21X5 FD21X4 FD21X3 FD21X2 FD21X1 FD21X0G327FD21X15 FD21X14 FD21X13 FD21X12 FD21X11 FD21X1...

  • Page 1528

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1510 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G350FD24X7 FD24X6 FD24X5 FD24X4 FD24X3 FD24X2 FD24X1 FD24X0G351FD24X15 FD24X14 FD24X13 FD24X12 FD24X11 FD24X10 FD24X9 FD24X8G352DT24X7 DT24X6 DT24X5 DT24X4 DT...

  • Page 1529

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1511 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G375OV8X7OV8X6OV8X5OV8X4OV8X3OV8X2OV8X1OV8X0G376OV9X7OV9X6OV9X5OV9X4OV9X3OV9X2OV9X1OV9X0G377OV10X7 OV10X6 OV10X5 OV10X4 OV10X3 OV10X2 OV10X1 OV10X0G378OV11X7 OV11X6 OV1...

  • Page 1530

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1512 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G400MSBK3*NZ3-LM3+LM3-EXL3+EXL3G401CD3X7CD3X6CD3X5CD3X4CD3X3CD3X2CD3X1CD3X0G402FD3X7FD3X6FD3X5FD3X4FD3X3FD3X2FD3X1FD3X0G403FD3X15 FD3X14 FD3X13 FD3X12 FD3X11 ...

  • Page 1531

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1513 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G425CD6X7CD6X6CD6X5CD6X4CD6X3CD6X2CD6X1CD6X0G426FD6X7FD6X6FD6X5FD6X4FD6X3FD6X2FD6X1FD6X0G427FD6X15 FD6X14 FD6X13 FD6X12 FD6X11 FD6X10FD6X9FD6X8G428DT6X7DT6X6DT6X5DT6X4D...

  • Page 1532

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1514 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G450FD9X7FD9X6FD9X5FD9X4FD9X3FD9X2FD9X1FD9X0G451FD9X15 FD9X14 FD9X13 FD9X12 FD9X11 FD9X10FD9X9FD9X8G452DT9X7DT9X6DT9X5DT9X4DT9X3DT9X2DT9X1DT9X0G453DT9X15 DT9X...

  • Page 1533

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1515 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G475FD12X15 FD12X14 FD12X13 FD12X12 FD12X11 FD12X10 FD12X9 FD12X8G476DT12X7 DT12X6 DT12X5 DT12X4 DT12X3 DT12X2 DT12X1 DT12X0G477DT12X15 DT12X14 DT12X13 DT12X12 DT12X11 ...

  • Page 1534

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1516 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0G500DT15X7 DT15X6 DT15X5 DT15X4 DT15X3 DT15X2 DT15X1 DT15X0G501DT15X15 DT15X14 DT15X13 DT15X12 DT15X11 DT15X10 DT15X9 DT15X8G502DT15X23 DT15X22 DT15X21 DT15X2...

  • Page 1535

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1517 -A.1.2 CNC to PMC#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F000MASAOPSTLSPLRSTALRWDF001CSSTHRDRPDTAPINCHIPENDENF002MZRNMBRNMSRNMMOVL MTCHIN MTESTF003MAGJMEDTMMEMMTMDMJMHMSF004MMLKMDLKMABSMSBKMBDT1MDRNMAFLF005MBD...

  • Page 1536

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1518 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F025T15T14T13T12T11T10T9T8F026T23T22T21T20T19T18T17T16F027T31T30T29T28T27T26T25T24F028B7B6B5B4B3B2B1B0F029B15B14B13B12B11B10B9B8F030B23B22B21B20B19B18B17B16F0...

  • Page 1537

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1519 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F050UO023UO022UO021UO020UO019UO018UO017UO016F051UO031UO030UO029UO028UO027UO026UO025UO024F052UO107UO106UO105UO104UO103UO102UO101UO100F053UO115UO114UO113UO112UO111UO110UO...

  • Page 1538

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1520 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F075MSCNTR3F076MDTCH4INP4ZP44ZP34MD4MV4ZP24ZP4F077+EOT4+EOT4FRP4ZRF4MMLK4MMI4F078CNCA4DEN4BUF4EGBM4AMR4TRQM4TRQL4F079MSCNTR4F080MDTCH5INP5ZP45ZP35MD5MV5ZP25ZP...

  • Page 1539

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1521 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F100MDTCH10INP10ZP410ZP310MD10MV10ZP210ZP10F101+EOT10 +EOT10FRP10ZRF10 MMLK10 MMI10F102CNCA10 DEN10BUF10EGBM10 AMR10 TRQM10 TRQL10F103MSCNTR10F104MDTCH11INP11ZP411ZP311...

  • Page 1540

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1522 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F125+EOT16 +EOT16FRP16ZRF16 MMLK16 MMI16F126CNCA16 DEN16BUF16EGBM16 AMR16 TRQM16 TRQL16F127MSCNTR16F128ZRNOSPOF129EDTOMEMOTOMDIOJOHOSOF130MLKOSBKOBDT1ODRNOF13...

  • Page 1541

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1523 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F150M507M506M505M504M503M502M501M500F151M515M514M513M512M511M510M509M508F152F153SYNERF154SPN2MCHAOAQSP4AQSP3F155AQSP2AQSP1SPN1SPN0AQSVRSPCRSPMRSPPF156OILF157D3MIMBCAN C...

  • Page 1542

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1524 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F175F176F177HCEXEHCAB2F178F179F180F181F182F183F184F185F186F187F188F189F190F191F192F193F194F195F196MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSCRCFNC RCHPCCFINCCHIPCF197ORARCTLMC...

  • Page 1543

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1525 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F200SLDM7C SLDM6C SLDM5C SLDM4C SLDM3C SLDM2C SLDM1C SLDM0CF201SLDM15C SLDM14C SLDM13C SLDM12C SLDM11C SLDM10CSLDM9C SLDM8CF202SSPD7C SSPD6C SSPD5C SSPD4C SSPD3C SSPD2C...

  • Page 1544

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1526 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F225F226F227F228MORA2A MORA1A PORA2A SLVSARCFNA RCHPACFINACHIPAF229ORARATLMALDT2ALDT1ASARASDTASSTAALMAF230F231INCSTA PC1DEAF232SLDM7A SLDM6A SLDM5A SLDM4A SLD...

  • Page 1545

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1527 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F250SSPD7B SSPD6B SSPD5B SSPD4B SSPD3B SSPD2B SSPD1B SSPD0BF251SSPD15B SSPD14B SSPD13B SSPD12B SSPD11B SSPD10BSSPD9B SSPD8BF252SSPA7B SSPA6B SSPA5B SSPA4B SSPA3B SSPA2B...

  • Page 1546

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1528 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F275F276F277F278F279F280F281F282F283F284F285F286F287F288MDTCH17INP17ZP417ZP317MD17MV17ZP217ZP17F289-EOT17 +EOT17FRP17ZRF17 MMLK17 MMI17F290CNCA17 DEN17BUF17EG...

  • Page 1547

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1529 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F300MDTCH20INP20ZP420ZP320MD20MV20ZP220ZP20F301-EOT20 +EOT20FRP20ZRF20 MMLK20 MMI20F302CNCA20 DEN20BUF20EGBM20 AMR20 TRQM20 TRQL20F303MSCNTR20F304MDTCH21INP21ZP421ZP321...

  • Page 1548

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1530 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F325MR15BMR14BMR13BMR12BMR11BMR10BMR9BMR8BF326RO7CRO6CRO5CRO4CRO3CRO2CRO1CRO0CF327RO15CRO14CRO13CRO12CRO11CRO10CRO9CRO8CF328AR7CAR6CAR5CAR4CAR3CAR2CAR1CAR0CF3...

  • Page 1549

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1531 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F350CTSF15 CTSF14 CTSF13 CTSF12 CTSF11 CTSF10 CTSF09 CTSF08F351CTSF23 CTSF22 CTSF21 CTSF20 CTSF19 CTSF18 CTSF17 CTSF16F352CTSF31 CTSF30 CTSF29 CTSF28 CTSF27 CTSF26 CTSF...

  • Page 1550

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1532 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F375F376F377F378F379F380F381F382F383F384F385F386F387F388F389F390F391F392F393F394F395F396F397F398F399

  • Page 1551

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1533 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F400F401F402F403F404F405F406F407F408F409F410F411F412F413F414F415F416F417F418F419F420F421F422F423F424

  • Page 1552

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1534 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F425F426F427F428F429F430F431F432F433F434F435F436F437F438F439F440F441F442F443F444F445F446F447F448F449

  • Page 1553

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1535 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F450F451F452F453F454F455F456F457F458F459F460F461F462F463F464F465F466F467F468F469F470F471F472F473F474

  • Page 1554

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1536 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F475F476F477F478F479F480F481F482F483F484F485F486F487F488F489F490F491F492F493F494F495F496F497F498F499

  • Page 1555

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1537 -#7#6#5#4#3#2#1#0F500F501F502F503F504F505F506F507F508F509F510F511

  • Page 1556

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1538 -A.2 SIGNAL LISTA.2.1 Signal List (in Order of Symbol)SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item11-% rapid traverse override signalG0407*+ED1External deceleration signalG06427....

  • Page 1557

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1539 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item*ACTF11Actual cutting feedrate display axis select signalG1074*ACTF12Actual cutting feedrate display axis select signalG1114*ACTF13Actual cuttin...

  • Page 1558

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1540 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item*DEC11Deceleration signal for reference position returnG10454.1*DEC12Deceleration signal for reference position returnG10854.1*DEC13D...

  • Page 1559

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1541 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item*IT8Axis-by-axis interlock signalG09242.5*IT9Axis-by-axis interlock signalG09642.5*IT10Axis-by-axis interlock signalG10042.5*IT11Axis-by-axis in...

  • Page 1560

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1542 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item*-L19Overtravel signalG24812.3.1*-L20Overtravel signalG25212.3.1*-L21Overtravel signalG25612.3.1*-L22Overtravel signalG26012.3.1*-L23...

  • Page 1561

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1543 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item*SVF21Servo off signalG25661.2.8*SVF22Servo off signalG26061.2.8*SVF23Servo off signalG26461.2.8*SVF24Servo off signalG26861.2.8*TLV0Tool life m...

  • Page 1562

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1544 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item+J4Feed axis/direction select signalG07703.1+J40Jog feed/manual step feed axis direction selection soft switchF1366+J5Feed axis/direc...

  • Page 1563

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1545 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item+MIT18+Minus direction manual feed interlockG2460+MIT19+Minus direction manual feed interlockG2500+MIT20+Minus direction manual feed interlockG2...

  • Page 1564

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1546 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item-J11Feed axis/direction select signalG10513.1-J12Feed axis/direction select signalG10913.1-J13Feed axis/direction select signalG11313...

  • Page 1565

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1547 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemAF3X3Auxiliary function BCD code signalF143314.1AF3X4Auxiliary function BCD code signalF143414.1AF3X5Auxiliary function BCD code signalF143514.1...

  • Page 1566

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1548 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemAQSVServo axis abnormal load detection signalF15532.9AR0AActual spindle speed signalF01209.5AR0BActual spindle speed signalF32209.5AR...

  • Page 1567

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1549 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemARSTCSerial spindle alarm reset signalG2100ARSTDSerial spindle alarm reset signalG2180AXC1Axis switching signalG041011.13AXC2Axis switching sign...

  • Page 1568

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1550 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemBUF13Buffer full signalF114514.1BUF14Buffer full signalF118514.1BUF15Buffer full signalF122514.1BUF16Buffer full signalF126514.1BUF17...

  • Page 1569

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1551 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemCD16X6Axis control command code signalG505614.1CD16X7Axis control command code signalG505714.1CD17X0Axis control command code signalG293014.1CD1...

  • Page 1570

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1552 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemCD24X1Axis control command code signalG349114.1CD24X2Axis control command code signalG349214.1CD24X3Axis control command code signalG...

  • Page 1571

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1553 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemCD9X4Axis control command code signalG449414.1CD9X5Axis control command code signalG449514.1CD9X6Axis control command code signalG449614.1CD9X7A...

  • Page 1572

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1554 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemCTSF13Custom soft key function signalsF350512.1.24CTSF14Custom soft key function signalsF350612.1.24CTSF15Custom soft key function si...

  • Page 1573

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1555 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDManual data input select signalG00332.6D3MIThree-dimensional coordinate conversion manual interrupt mode signal F15753.6, 11.12D3ROTThree-dimen...

  • Page 1574

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1556 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT10X0Axis control data signalG460014.1DT10X1Axis control data signalG460114.1DT10X2Axis control data signalG460214.1DT10X3Axis contr...

  • Page 1575

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1557 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT12X3Axis control data signalG476314.1DT12X4Axis control data signalG476414.1DT12X5Axis control data signalG476514.1DT12X6Axis control data sig...

  • Page 1576

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1558 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT14X6Axis control data signalG492614.1DT14X7Axis control data signalG492714.1DT14X8Axis control data signalG493014.1DT14X9Axis contr...

  • Page 1577

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1559 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT16X9Axis control data signalG509114.1DT16X10Axis control data signalG509214.1DT16X11Axis control data signalG509314.1DT16X12Axis control data ...

  • Page 1578

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1560 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT18X12Axis control data signalG3054DT18X13Axis control data signalG3055DT18X14Axis control data signalG3056DT18X15Axis control data ...

  • Page 1579

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1561 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT1X15Axis control data signalG389714.1DT1X16Axis control data signalG390014.1DT1X17Axis control data signalG390114.1DT1X18Axis control data sig...

  • Page 1580

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1562 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT21X18Axis control data signalG3302DT21X19Axis control data signalG3303DT21X20Axis control data signalG3304DT21X21Axis control data ...

  • Page 1581

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1563 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT23X21Axis control data signalG3465DT23X22Axis control data signalG3466DT23X23Axis control data signalG3467DT23X24Axis control data signalG3470...

  • Page 1582

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1564 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT2X24Axis control data signalG399014.1DT2X25Axis control data signalG399114.1DT2X26Axis control data signalG399214.1DT2X27Axis contr...

  • Page 1583

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1565 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT4X27Axis control data signalG415314.1DT4X28Axis control data signalG415414.1DT4X29Axis control data signalG415514.1DT4X30Axis control data sig...

  • Page 1584

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1566 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT6X30Axis control data signalG431614.1DT6X31Axis control data signalG431714.1DT7X0Axis control data signalG436014.1DT7X1Axis control...

  • Page 1585

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1567 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDT9X1Axis control data signalG452114.1DT9X2Axis control data signalG452214.1DT9X3Axis control data signalG452314.1DT9X4Axis control data signalG...

  • Page 1586

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1568 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemDVAL12V-READY OFF ALARM INVALIDATION SIGNALG11132.8DVAL13V-READY OFF ALARM INVALIDATION SIGNALG11532.8DVAL14V-READY OFF ALARM INVALID...

  • Page 1587

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1569 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemEID18Data signal for external data inputG0382EID19Data signal for external data inputG0383EID20Data signal for external data inputG0384EID21Data...

  • Page 1588

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1570 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemEOD26Data signal for external data outputF039214.1.1EOD27Data signal for external data outputF039314.1.1EOD28Data signal for external...

  • Page 1589

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1571 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD10X8Feedrate specification signalG459014.1FD10X9Feedrate specification signalG459114.1FD10X10Feedrate specification signalG459214.1FD10X11Feed...

  • Page 1590

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1572 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD14X11Feedrate specification signalG491314.1FD14X12Feedrate specification signalG491414.1FD14X13Feedrate specification signalG491514...

  • Page 1591

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1573 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD18X14Feedrate specification signalG303614.1FD18X15Feedrate specification signalG303714.1FD19X0Feedrate specification signalG310014.1FD19X1Feed...

  • Page 1592

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1574 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD22X1Feedrate specification signalG334114.1FD22X2Feedrate specification signalG334214.1FD22X3Feedrate specification signalG334314.1F...

  • Page 1593

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1575 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD3X4Feedrate specification signalG402414.1FD3X5Feedrate specification signalG402514.1FD3X6Feedrate specification signalG402614.1FD3X7Feedrate s...

  • Page 1594

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1576 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFD7X7Feedrate specification signalG434714.1FD7X8Feedrate specification signalG435014.1FD7X9Feedrate specification signalG435114.1FD7X...

  • Page 1595

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1577 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemFRP20Floating reference position return completion signalF30154.6FRP21Floating reference position return completion signalF30554.6FRP22Floating ...

  • Page 1596

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1578 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemINCSTDSerial spindle incremental orientation mode signalF2151INDXASerial spindle orientation stop position change command signalG2290...

  • Page 1597

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1579 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemM18Auxiliary function code signalF01828.1, 9.3, 9.6M19Auxiliary function code signalF01838.1, 9.3, 9.6M20Auxiliary function code signalF01848.1,...

  • Page 1598

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1580 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemM503Auxiliary function code signalF15038.3M504Auxiliary function code signalF15048.3M505Auxiliary function code signalF15058.3M506Aux...

  • Page 1599

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1581 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemMDTCH7Controlled-axis removal in progress signalF08871.2.4MDTCH8Controlled-axis removal in progress signalF09271.2.4MDTCH9Controlled-axis remova...

  • Page 1600

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1582 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference item-MIT3-Minus direction manual feed interlockG0741-MIT4-Minus direction manual feed interlockG0781-MIT5-Minus direction manual feed int...

  • Page 1601

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1583 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemMMI18Mirror image confirmation signalF29301.2.6MMI19Mirror image confirmation signalF29701.2.6MMI20Mirror image confirmation signalF30101.2.6MMI...

  • Page 1602

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1584 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemMR11DMaximum spindle speed signalF33739.3, 9.4MR12AMaximum spindle speed signalF01549.4MR12BMaximum spindle speed signalF32549.4MR12C...

  • Page 1603

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1585 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemMSBK9Block stop inhibit signalG448714.1MSBK10Block stop inhibit signalG456714.1MSBK11Block stop inhibit signalG464714.1MSBK12Block stop inhibit ...

  • Page 1604

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1586 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemMV23Axis travel in progress signalF31221.2.5MV24Axis travel in progress signalF31621.2.5MZRNManual reference position return selectio...

  • Page 1605

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1587 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemORCMDSerial spindle orientation command signalG2196OTALMAlarm division signalF006312.1.3OV10X0Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisG...

  • Page 1606

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1588 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemOV18X1Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisG358114.1OV18X2Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisG358214.1OV18X...

  • Page 1607

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1589 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemOV2X4Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisG369414.1OV2X5Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisG369514.1OV2X6Override sign...

  • Page 1608

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1590 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemOVA7Override signal for PMC axis control in simultaneous start modeG383714.1OVCOverride cancellation signalG00447.1.7.4OVRIDASerial s...

  • Page 1609

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1591 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemPMCA7Axis control command read strobe signalG090714.1PMCA8Axis control command read strobe signalG094714.1PMCA9Axis control command read strobe ...

  • Page 1610

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1592 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemRCHHGASerial spindle switching HIGH-side MCC contact state signalG2297RCHHGBSerial spindle switching HIGH-side MCC contact state sign...

  • Page 1611

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1593 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemRO0ASpecified spindle speed signalF01009.3, 9.4RO0BSpecified spindle speed signalF32009.3, 9.4RO0CSpecified spindle speed signalF32609.4RO0DSpec...

  • Page 1612

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1594 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemcommand signalROTACSerial spindle orientation stop position change-time rotation directioncommand signalG2131ROTADSerial spindle orie...

  • Page 1613

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1595 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemS11Spindle function code signalF02138.1, 9.1, 9.3, 9.8S12Spindle function code signalF02148.1, 9.1, 9.3, 9.8S13Spindle function code signalF0215...

  • Page 1614

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1596 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSCNTR12Spindle contour control mode switching signalG11179.7SCNTR13Spindle contour control mode switching signalG11579.7SCNTR14Spindl...

  • Page 1615

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1597 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSLDM0CSerial spindle motor torque signalF20009.3SLDM0DSerial spindle motor torque signalF21609.3SLDM10ASerial spindle motor torque signalF23329....

  • Page 1616

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1598 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSLVSBSerial spindle subordinate operation state signalF2444SLVSCSerial spindle subordinate operation state signalF1964SLVSDSerial spi...

  • Page 1617

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1599 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSRVDSerial spindle reverse rotation command signalG2194SSPCanned cycle spindle stop signalF008711.6SSPA0ASerial spindle alarm code signalF23609....

  • Page 1618

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1600 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSSPD2BSerial spindle motor speed signalF25029.3SSPD2CSerial spindle motor speed signalF20229.3SSPD2DSerial spindle motor speed signal...

  • Page 1619

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1601 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemSYNC1Synchronization control select signalG06621.10.5, 1.11SYNC2Synchronization control select signalG07021.10.5, 1.11SYNC3Synchronization contr...

  • Page 1620

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1602 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemTHD04Thermal growth compensation dataG17841.3.13THD05Thermal growth compensation dataG17851.3.13THD06Thermal growth compensation data...

  • Page 1621

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1603 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemTRQL14Torque limit reach signal outputF118014.5.4TRQL15Torque limit reach signal outputF122014.5.4TRQL16Torque limit reach signal outputF126014....

  • Page 1622

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1604 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemUI030Input signal for custom macrosG051611.5.1UI031Input signal for custom macrosG051711.5.1UI100Input signal for custom macrosG05201...

  • Page 1623

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1605 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemUI301Input signal for custom macrosG060111.5.1UI302Input signal for custom macrosG060211.5.1UI303Input signal for custom macrosG060311.5.1UI304I...

  • Page 1624

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1606 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemUO103Output signal for custom macrosF052311.5.1UO104Output signal for custom macrosF052411.5.1UO105Output signal for custom macrosF05...

  • Page 1625

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1607 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemUO306Output signal for custom macrosF060611.5.1UO307Output signal for custom macrosF060711.5.1UO308Output signal for custom macrosF061011.5.1UO3...

  • Page 1626

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1608 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemZP12Reference position return completion signalF10804.1, 9.6, 9.7ZP13Reference position return completion signalF11204.1, 9.6, 9.7ZP1...

  • Page 1627

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1609 -SymbolSignal nameAddressBitReference itemZP323Third reference position return completion signalF31244.1, 4.5ZP324Third reference position return completion signalF31644.1, 4.5ZP41Forth ...

  • Page 1628

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1610 -A.2.2 Signal List (in Order of Address)AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0000Rewind-in-progress signalRWD5.2F0001Alarm signalAL2.4, 12.1.3F0002Reset-in-progress signalRS...

  • Page 1629

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1611 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0096M DECODE SIGNALDM028.1F0097M DECODE SIGNALDM308.1F0100Specified spindle speed signalRO0A9.3, 9.4F0101Specified spindle speed signalRO1A9.3, 9....

  • Page 1630

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1612 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0182Auxiliary function code signalM188.1, 9.3, 9.6F0183Auxiliary function code signalM198.1, 9.3, 9.6F0184Auxiliary function code signa...

  • Page 1631

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1613 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0266Tool function code signalT228.1F0267Tool function code signalT238.1F0270Tool function code signalT248.1F0271Tool function code signalT258.1F02...

  • Page 1632

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1614 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0357Data signal for external data outputEOD4714.1.1F0360Data signal for external data outputEOD014.1.1F0361Data signal for external dat...

  • Page 1633

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1615 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0476High-speed skip state signalHDO614.5.2F0477High-speed skip state signalHDO714.5.2F0480Output signal for custom macrosUO00011.5.1F0481Output si...

  • Page 1634

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1616 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0562Output signal for custom macrosUO20211.5.1F0563Output signal for custom macrosUO20311.5.1F0564Output signal for custom macrosUO2041...

  • Page 1635

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1617 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0646In-position signalINP17.2.3.1F0647Controlled-axis removal in progress signalMDTCH11.2.4F0650Mirror image confirmation signalMMI11.2.6F0651Axis...

  • Page 1636

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1618 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0770Mirror image confirmation signalMMI41.2.6F0771Axis-by-axis machine lock confirmation signalMMLK45.3.1F0772Reference position establ...

  • Page 1637

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1619 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF0892Reference position establishment signalZRF74.1, 4.7F0895Floating reference position return completion signalFRP74.6F0896PMC axis overtravel si...

  • Page 1638

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1620 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1016PMC axis overtravel signal+EOT1014.1F1017PMC axis overtravel signal-EOT1014.1F1020Torque limit reach signal outputTRQL1014.5.4F1021...

  • Page 1639

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1621 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1140Torque limit reach signal outputTRQL1314.5.4F1141Torque control mode signalTRQM1314.1F1142Linear motor activation phase establishment signalAM...

  • Page 1640

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1622 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1262Linear motor activation phase establishment signalAMR16F1263EGB MODE SIGNALEGBM161.13.5F1265Buffer full signalBUF1614.1F1266Distrib...

  • Page 1641

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1623 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1375General-purpose soft switchOPU5F1376General-purpose soft switchOPU6F1377General-purpose soft switchOPU7F1380Jog feed/manual step feed axis dir...

  • Page 1642

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1624 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1485Auxiliary function code signalM4058.3F1486Auxiliary function code signalM4068.3F1487Auxiliary function code signalM4078.3F1490Auxil...

  • Page 1643

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1625 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF1777Hard copy in progress signalHCEXE13.4F1960Serial spindle power line switching signalCHIPCF1961Serial spindle switching completion signalCFINCF...

  • Page 1644

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1626 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF2131Serial spindle speed zero signalSSTDF2132Serial spindle speed detection signalSDTDF2133Serial spindle speed arrival signalSARDF2134...

  • Page 1645

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1627 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF2321Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM1A9.3F2322Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM2A9.3F2323Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM3A9.3F23...

  • Page 1646

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1628 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF2493Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM11B9.3F2494Serial spindle motor torque signalSLDM12B9.3F2495Serial spindle motor torque signa...

  • Page 1647

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1629 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF2943EGB MODE SIGNALEGBM181.13.5F2945Buffer full signalBUF1814.1F2946Distribution completion signalDEN1814.1F2947Axis control command read completi...

  • Page 1648

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1630 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF3066Distribution completion signalDEN2114.1F3067Axis control command read completion signalCNCA2114.1F3077Spindle contour control mode ...

  • Page 1649

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1631 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF3197Spindle contour control mode switching confirmation signalMSCNTR249.7F3200Specified spindle speed signalRO0B9.3, 9.4F3201Specified spindle spe...

  • Page 1650

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1632 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF3283Actual spindle speed signalAR3C9.5F3284Actual spindle speed signalAR4C9.5F3285Actual spindle speed signalAR5C9.5F3286Actual spindle...

  • Page 1651

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1633 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF3367Maximum spindle speed signalMR7D9.3, 9.4F3370Maximum spindle speed signalMR8D9.3, 9.4F3371Maximum spindle speed signalMR9D9.3, 9.4F3372Maximum...

  • Page 1652

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1634 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemF3531Custom soft key function signalsCTSF3312.1.24F3532Custom soft key function signalsCTSF3412.1.24F3533Custom soft key function signal...

  • Page 1653

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1635 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0030Incremental feed select signalS2.6G0031Manual handle feed select signalH2.6G0032Jog feed select signalJ2.6G0033Manual data input select signal...

  • Page 1654

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1636 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0127Feedrate override signal*FV77.1.7.2G0130Second feedrate override signal*AFV07.1.7.3G0131Second feedrate override signal*AFV17.1.7.3...

  • Page 1655

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1637 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0214Incremental feed travel distance select signalDIST123.1G0215Incremental feed travel distance select signalDIST133.1G0216Incremental feed trave...

  • Page 1656

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1638 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0335Address signal for external data inputEIA514.1.1G0336Address signal for external data inputEIA614.1.1G0337Address signal for extern...

  • Page 1657

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1639 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0432Manual handle feed axis select signalHS1EG0434Manual arbitrary-angle feed axis select signalAJP1EG0435Manual arbitrary-angle feed axis select ...

  • Page 1658

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1640 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0532Input signal for custom macrosUI11011.5.1G0533Input signal for custom macrosUI11111.5.1G0534Input signal for custom macrosUI11211.5...

  • Page 1659

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1641 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0616Input signal for custom macrosUI31411.5.1G0617Input signal for custom macrosUI31511.5.1G0620Input signal for custom macrosUI31611.5.1G0621Inpu...

  • Page 1660

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1642 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0714Actual cutting feedrate display axis select signal*ACTF2G0715Separate detector disconnection alarm ignore signalNDCAL214.1G0716Velo...

  • Page 1661

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1643 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0812Mirror image signalMI51.2.6G0813Axis-by-axis machine lock signalMLK55.3.1G0814Parking signalPK51.8G0820+Minus direction manual feed interlock+...

  • Page 1662

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1644 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG0915Separate detector disconnection alarm ignore signalNDCAL714.1G0916Velocity command skip signalVCSKP714.1G0917Spindle contour contro...

  • Page 1663

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1645 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG1013Axis-by-axis machine lock signalMLK105.3.1G1014Parking signalPK101.8G1020+Minus direction manual feed interlock+MIT10G1021-Minus direction man...

  • Page 1664

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1646 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG1116Velocity command skip signalVCSKP1214.1G1117Spindle contour control mode switching signalSCNTR129.7G1120Overtravel signal*+L132.3.1...

  • Page 1665

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1647 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG1214Parking signalPK151.8G1220+Minus direction manual feed interlock+MIT15G1221-Minus direction manual feed interlock-MIT15G1222Synchronization co...

  • Page 1666

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1648 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG1432Extended external workpiece number search signalEWN2615.2G1460Second feedrate override signal B*AFV0B7.1.7.3G1461Second feedrate ov...

  • Page 1667

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1649 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2080Spindle motor command voltage signalRI0C9.3G2081Spindle motor command voltage signalRI1C9.3G2082Spindle motor command voltage signalRI2C9.3G20...

  • Page 1668

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1650 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2183Serial spindle power line switching completion signalMCFNDG2184Serial spindle soft start/stop cancellation signalSOCNDG2185Serial s...

  • Page 1669

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1651 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2305Serial spindle orientation stop position command signalSH5A9.9G2306Serial spindle orientation stop position command signalSH6A9.9G2307Serial s...

  • Page 1670

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1652 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2411Feed axis/direction select signal-J173.1G2412Mirror image signalMI171.2.6G2413Axis-by-axis machine lock signalMLK175.3.1G2414Parkin...

  • Page 1671

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1653 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2514Actual cutting feedrate display axis select signal*ACTF19G2515Separate detector disconnection alarm ignore signalNDCAL1914.1G2516Velocity comm...

  • Page 1672

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1654 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2612Mirror image signalMI221.2.6G2613Axis-by-axis machine lock signalMLK225.3.1G2614Parking signalPK221.8G2620+Minus direction manual f...

  • Page 1673

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1655 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2715Separate detector disconnection alarm ignore signalNDCAL2414.1G2716Velocity command skip signalVCSKP2414.1G2717Spindle contour control mode sw...

  • Page 1674

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1656 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG2970Axis control data signalDT17X8G2971Axis control data signalDT17X9G2972Axis control data signalDT17X10G2973Axis control data signalD...

  • Page 1675

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1657 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3056Axis control data signalDT18X14G3057Axis control data signalDT18X15G3060Axis control data signalDT18X16G3061Axis control data signalDT18X17G30...

  • Page 1676

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1658 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3144Axis control data signalDT19X20G3145Axis control data signalDT19X21G3146Axis control data signalDT19X22G3147Axis control data signa...

  • Page 1677

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1659 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3232Axis control data signalDT20X26G3233Axis control data signalDT20X27G3234Axis control data signalDT20X28G3235Axis control data signalDT20X29G32...

  • Page 1678

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1660 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3320Axis-direction-by-axis-direction stored stroke limit switching signal+EXL222.3.2G3321Axis-direction-by-axis-direction stored stroke...

  • Page 1679

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1661 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3410Axis control command code signalCD23X014.1G3411Axis control command code signalCD23X114.1G3412Axis control command code signalCD23X214.1G3413A...

  • Page 1680

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1662 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3496Axis control command code signalCD24X614.1G3497Axis control command code signalCD24X714.1G3500Feedrate specification signalFD24X014...

  • Page 1681

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1663 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3582Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV18X214.1G3583Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV18X314.1G3584Override signa...

  • Page 1682

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1664 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3696Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV2X614.1G3697Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV2X714.1G3700Overr...

  • Page 1683

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1665 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3782Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV11X214.1G3783Override signal for PMC axis control on each axisOV11X314.1G3784Override signa...

  • Page 1684

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1666 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3870Feedrate specification signalFD1X814.1G3871Feedrate specification signalFD1X914.1G3872Feedrate specification signalFD1X1014.1G3873F...

  • Page 1685

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1667 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG3956Feedrate specification signalFD2X1414.1G3957Feedrate specification signalFD2X1514.1G3960Axis control data signalDT2X014.1G3961Axis control dat...

  • Page 1686

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1668 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4044Axis control data signalDT3X414.1G4045Axis control data signalDT3X514.1G4046Axis control data signalDT3X614.1G4047Axis control data...

  • Page 1687

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1669 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4132Axis control data signalDT4X1014.1G4133Axis control data signalDT4X1114.1G4134Axis control data signalDT4X1214.1G4135Axis control data signalD...

  • Page 1688

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1670 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4220Axis control data signalDT5X1614.1G4221Axis control data signalDT5X1714.1G4222Axis control data signalDT5X1814.1G4223Axis control d...

  • Page 1689

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1671 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4306Axis control data signalDT6X2214.1G4307Axis control data signalDT6X2314.1G4310Axis control data signalDT6X2414.1G4311Axis control data signalD...

  • Page 1690

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1672 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4394Axis control data signalDT7X2814.1G4395Axis control data signalDT7X2914.1G4396Axis control data signalDT7X3014.1G4397Axis control d...

  • Page 1691

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1673 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4482Stroke limit externally setting signal+LM92.3.2G4483Stroke limit externally setting signal-LM92.3.2G4484Reference position proximity signal*NZ...

  • Page 1692

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1674 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4572Axis control command code signalCD10X214.1G4573Axis control command code signalCD10X314.1G4574Axis control command code signalCD10X...

  • Page 1693

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1675 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4660Feedrate specification signalFD11X014.1G4661Feedrate specification signalFD11X114.1G4662Feedrate specification signalFD11X214.1G4663Feedrate s...

  • Page 1694

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1676 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4746Feedrate specification signalFD12X614.1G4747Feedrate specification signalFD12X714.1G4750Feedrate specification signalFD12X814.1G475...

  • Page 1695

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1677 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4834Feedrate specification signalFD13X1214.1G4835Feedrate specification signalFD13X1314.1G4836Feedrate specification signalFD13X1414.1G4837Feedrat...

  • Page 1696

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1678 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG4922Axis control data signalDT14X214.1G4923Axis control data signalDT14X314.1G4924Axis control data signalDT14X414.1G4925Axis control d...

  • Page 1697

    B-63783EN-1/01 APPENDIX A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC- 1679 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG5010Axis control data signalDT15X814.1G5011Axis control data signalDT15X914.1G5012Axis control data signalDT15X1014.1G5013Axis control data signal...

  • Page 1698

    A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63783EN-1/01- 1680 -AddressSignal nameSymbolReference itemG5096Axis control data signalDT16X1414.1G5097Axis control data signalDT16X1514.1G5100Axis control data signalDT16X1614.1G5101Axis contro...

  • Page 1699

    B-63783EN-1/01 INDEXi-1INDEX<Number>128 Straightness Compensation Points........................... 592-LCD-unit Connection Function................

  • Page 1700

    INDEX B-63783EN-1/01i-2DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, ANDNOTE .......................................................................s-1Description of Commands Compatible with Thosef...

  • Page 1701

    B-63783EN-1/01 INDEXi-3<L>LINEAR INTERPOLATION ....................................... 550LINEAR SCALE WITH REFERENCE MARK .......... 459LOADING ...

  • Page 1702

    INDEX B-63783EN-1/01i-4READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE.......................... 1369READY SIGNALS....................................................... 299Recovery from Excessive Synchrono...

  • Page 1703

    B-63783EN-1/01 INDEXi-5Three-dimensional Coordinate Conversion andParallel Axis Control............................................ 1226Three-dimension...

  • Page 1704

  • Page 1705

    Revision RecordFANUC Series 15i/150i-MODELB CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63783EN-1)01Jan., 2002EditionDateContentsEditionDateContents

  • Page 1706

  • Page 1707

    • No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.• All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

  • Abstract

    B-63783EN-1/01 1.AXIS CONTROL- 149 -Example of axis configuration and parameter setting- Example1Fig. 1.5.3 (h)Fig. 1.5.3 (i)The connection of slaves (servo amplifiers) and controlled axes isdetermined by parameter Nos. 1023 and 1080 to 1089. In the exampleshown in Fig. 1.5.3. (h), slaves 2, 3, and 4 are connected to A, Y, and Z.By changing parameter Nos. 1081 to 1083 from 1, 2, and 3 to 2, 3, and1, they are connected to Y, Z, and A, as shown in Fig. 1.5.3 (i).

x